1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
73 \default_output_format pdf2
75 \bibtex_command bibtex
76 \index_command default
80 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
81 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
85 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
86 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
87 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
92 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
93 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
96 \use_package amsmath 1
97 \use_package amssymb 1
100 \use_package mathdots 1
101 \use_package mathtools 0
102 \use_package mhchem 1
103 \use_package stackrel 0
104 \use_package stmaryrd 1
105 \use_package undertilde 0
107 \cite_engine_type default
111 \paperorientation portrait
115 \notefontcolor #0000ff
132 \paragraph_separation skip
134 \quotes_style english
138 \paperpagestyle default
139 \tracking_changes true
140 \output_changes false
144 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
145 \author 274215730 "scott"
146 \author 424524441 "rgheck"
157 by the \SpecialChar LyX
162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
164 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
165 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
166 Documentation mailing list:
167 \begin_inset CommandInset href
169 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
180 \begin_inset Newline newline
184 \begin_inset Newline newline
188 \begin_inset Note Note
191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
192 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
193 \begin_inset Newline newline
198 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
199 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
207 \begin_layout Standard
208 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
209 LatexCommand tableofcontents
216 \begin_layout Chapter
220 \begin_layout Section
221 What is \SpecialChar LyX
225 \begin_layout Standard
227 is a document preparation system.
228 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
229 scripts, publishable books, business
230 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
231 It is unlike most other
232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
239 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
241 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 pt type, left justified, 5
258 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
267 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
271 \begin_layout Standard
272 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
277 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
281 \begin_layout Standard
286 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
287 's philosophy: most importantly,
288 the format of all of the manuals.
289 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
290 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
296 manual describes that, too.
299 \begin_layout Section
304 \begin_layout Standard
305 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
306 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
308 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
309 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
313 \begin_layout Standard
314 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
315 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
316 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
318 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
319 only a vertical scrollbar.
320 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
321 The first case is large images.
322 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
323 image and use the option
334 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
337 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
338 this doesn't work for equations yet.
341 \begin_layout Standard
342 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
343 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
351 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
358 \begin_layout Section
362 \begin_layout Standard
363 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
365 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
367 Just select the manual you want to read from the
374 \begin_layout Section
375 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
377 \begin_inset CommandInset label
379 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
386 \begin_layout Standard
387 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
388 can be configured via the menu
390 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
394 \begin_inset Index idx
397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
404 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
406 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
407 packages are available.
408 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
410 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
412 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
413 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
417 \begin_inset space \space{}
420 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
421 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
423 To force \SpecialChar LyX
424 to re-inspect your system, you should use
426 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
430 \begin_inset Index idx
433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
434 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
440 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
441 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
444 \begin_layout Section
447 \begin_inset CommandInset label
449 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
456 \begin_layout Standard
457 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
458 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
459 installed, but you will not be
460 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
461 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
462 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
463 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
464 document can always be output as plain text
468 \begin_layout Standard
469 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
470 or DocBook classes or packages.
471 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
472 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
475 \begin_layout Standard
476 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
477 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
478 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
481 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
489 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
490 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
493 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
497 \begin_inset Index idx
500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
501 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
509 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
516 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
520 \begin_layout Chapter
521 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
525 \begin_layout Section
526 Basic File Operations
527 \begin_inset Index idx
530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
539 \begin_layout Standard
544 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
545 in addition to some more advanced operations:
548 \begin_layout Itemize
570 \begin_layout Itemize
586 arg "buffer-new-template"
592 \begin_layout Itemize
614 \begin_layout Itemize
624 \begin_layout Itemize
638 \begin_layout Itemize
660 \begin_layout Itemize
672 arg "buffer-write-as"
678 \begin_layout Itemize
692 \begin_layout Itemize
706 \begin_layout Standard
707 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
708 a few minor differences.
711 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
722 command lists the available templates.
723 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
724 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
725 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
733 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
740 \begin_layout Standard
741 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
773 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
774 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
775 is just that — a big, blank space.
783 \begin_layout Standard
804 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
809 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
812 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
830 will reload the document from disk.
831 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
832 and want to restore it to the last save.
841 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
842 them as your changes.
845 \begin_layout Section
846 Basic Editing Features
847 \begin_inset Index idx
850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
857 \begin_inset CommandInset label
859 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
866 \begin_layout Standard
867 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
868 can perform cut and paste operations
869 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
870 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
871 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
872 editing features and how to access
874 We will start with cut and paste.
877 \begin_layout Standard
878 As you might expect, the
882 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
883 various other editing features.
884 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
888 \begin_layout Itemize
894 \begin_inset Index idx
897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
926 \begin_layout Itemize
932 \begin_inset Index idx
935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
964 \begin_layout Itemize
970 \begin_inset Index idx
973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
998 \begin_layout Itemize
1002 \begin_inset space ~
1008 \begin_layout Itemize
1012 \begin_inset space ~
1018 \begin_layout Itemize
1022 \begin_inset space ~
1026 \begin_inset space ~
1032 \begin_inset Index idx
1035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1044 \begin_inset Index idx
1047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1062 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1072 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1078 \begin_layout Standard
1079 The first three are self-explanatory.
1080 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1081 and other programs by
1102 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1103 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1108 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1109 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1110 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1111 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1112 into individual cells.
1116 \begin_inset space ~
1121 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1122 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1126 \begin_layout Standard
1130 \begin_inset space ~
1135 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1137 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1139 \begin_inset space ~
1146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1152 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1153 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1154 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1156 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1160 \begin_inset space \space{}
1163 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1164 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1167 \begin_inset space ~
1170 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1172 \begin_inset space ~
1176 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1180 \begin_inset space ~
1189 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1190 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1192 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1196 \begin_inset space ~
1201 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1202 start a new paragraph.
1203 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1204 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1209 \begin_inset space ~
1212 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1214 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1218 \begin_inset space ~
1226 \begin_inset space ~
1229 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1232 paste from the primary selection.
1233 This is normally the currently selected text.
1236 \begin_layout Standard
1239 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1241 \begin_inset space ~
1245 \begin_inset space ~
1253 \begin_inset space ~
1257 \begin_inset space ~
1263 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1269 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1272 \begin_inset space ~
1281 \begin_inset space ~
1286 button to skip the current word.
1290 \begin_inset space ~
1295 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1299 \begin_inset space ~
1304 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1306 If the toggle is set, searching for
1307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1318 will not match the word
1319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1333 Match whole words only
1335 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1336 to only find complete words, e.
1337 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1366 offers also an advanced
1369 \begin_inset space ~
1373 \begin_inset space ~
1378 feature that is described in section
1379 \begin_inset space ~
1383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1385 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1392 \begin_layout Standard
1393 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1394 \begin_inset space \space{}
1398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1406 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1408 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1413 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1420 \begin_layout Standard
1424 arg "inset-select-all"
1427 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1428 When the cursor is inside an inset
1431 arg "inset-select-all"
1434 selects the content of the inset.
1438 arg "inset-select-all"
1441 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1446 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1449 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1453 \begin_layout Section
1455 \begin_inset Index idx
1458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1465 \begin_inset Index idx
1468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1475 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1477 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1484 \begin_layout Standard
1485 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1487 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1490 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1493 or the toolbar button
1499 to undo some mistake.
1500 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1502 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1505 or the toolbar button
1512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1519 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1520 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1523 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1526 \begin_layout Standard
1527 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1536 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1537 This is a consequence of the 100
1538 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1541 step undo limit mentioned above.
1544 \begin_layout Standard
1553 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1555 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1559 \begin_layout Section
1561 \begin_inset Index idx
1564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1573 \begin_layout Standard
1574 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1577 \begin_layout Enumerate
1582 \begin_layout Itemize
1587 once anywhere in the edit window.
1588 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1592 \begin_layout Enumerate
1597 \begin_layout Itemize
1604 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1607 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1610 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1611 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1614 \begin_layout Itemize
1615 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1618 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1625 \begin_layout Enumerate
1626 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1630 \begin_layout Standard
1631 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1632 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1636 \begin_layout Section
1638 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1640 name "sec:Navigating"
1645 \begin_inset Index idx
1648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1657 \begin_layout Standard
1659 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1662 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1668 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1671 \begin_layout Itemize
1672 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1674 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1676 \begin_inset space ~
1681 or by the toolbar button
1684 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1690 \begin_layout Itemize
1691 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1693 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1696 and use the same menu to return to them.
1697 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1700 \begin_layout Standard
1704 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1709 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1710 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1712 \begin_inset space ~
1717 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1718 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1719 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1720 your last editing position.
1723 \begin_layout Standard
1728 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1732 \begin_layout Subsection
1734 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1736 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1741 \begin_inset Index idx
1744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1745 Navigating ! Outline
1751 \begin_inset Index idx
1754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1763 \begin_layout Standard
1764 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1765 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1766 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1768 \begin_inset space ~
1772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1774 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1778 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1779 \begin_inset space ~
1783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1785 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1790 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1794 \begin_layout Standard
1795 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1796 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1797 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1798 dialog and to modify the citation.
1801 \begin_layout Standard
1802 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1804 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1805 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1813 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1816 \begin_layout Standard
1817 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1818 you further to control the display.
1823 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1824 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1830 option keeps it in the current view state.
1831 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1832 \begin_inset space ~
1835 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1836 \begin_inset space ~
1839 3, the subsections of sections
1840 \begin_inset space ~
1843 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1848 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1849 \begin_inset space ~
1853 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1863 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1866 \begin_layout Standard
1873 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1874 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1888 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1889 So, for example, you can move section
1890 \begin_inset space ~
1894 \begin_inset space ~
1897 2.4 or after section
1898 \begin_inset space ~
1903 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1916 (or the corresponding key bindings
1924 ) you can change the level of sections.
1925 So you can for example make section
1926 \begin_inset space ~
1930 \begin_inset space ~
1934 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_layout Standard
1941 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1942 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1945 \begin_layout Subsection
1946 Horizontal Scrolling
1947 \begin_inset Index idx
1950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1951 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1959 \begin_layout Standard
1961 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1963 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1967 \begin_inset space \space{}
1971 \begin_inset space ~
1974 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1975 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1976 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1980 \begin_layout Standard
1981 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1985 \begin_layout Itemize
1987 is used on a small tablet computer
1990 \begin_layout Itemize
1991 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
1995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2003 \begin_inset space ~
2016 \begin_layout Itemize
2017 Math constructs with long command names
2020 \begin_layout Standard
2021 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2022 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2024 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2025 windows so that table
2026 \begin_inset space ~
2030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2032 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2037 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2039 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2040 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2043 \begin_layout Standard
2044 \begin_inset Float table
2050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2051 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2054 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2056 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2060 Horizontal scrolling test.
2068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2070 \begin_inset Tabular
2071 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2072 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2073 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2074 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2075 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2117 \begin_layout Section
2118 Input/Word Completion
2119 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2121 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2126 \begin_inset Index idx
2129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2136 \begin_inset Index idx
2139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2170 \begin_layout Standard
2172 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2174 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2175 is used to propose completions.
2178 \begin_layout Standard
2179 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2182 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2187 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2194 \begin_inset space ~
2198 \begin_inset space ~
2203 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2207 \begin_inset space ~
2212 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2213 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2217 \begin_inset space ~
2223 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2224 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2225 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2226 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2229 \begin_layout Standard
2231 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2232 completions available.
2237 key to accept a proposed completion.
2238 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2239 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2240 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2247 \begin_layout Standard
2248 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2249 ing options for text.
2250 The special math option
2254 enables characters to be composed.
2255 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2256 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2259 , you can then input the characters
2260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2271 to a formula to get it.
2272 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2273 of the math toolbar.
2274 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2278 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2279 's installation folder.
2280 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2289 \begin_layout Section
2291 \begin_inset Index idx
2294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2301 \begin_inset Index idx
2304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2333 \begin_inset Index idx
2336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2367 \begin_layout Standard
2368 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2382 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2385 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2389 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2390 \begin_inset space ~
2394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2396 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2403 \begin_layout Standard
2407 \begin_inset space ~
2415 \begin_inset space ~
2436 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2440 \begin_layout Labeling
2441 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2445 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2446 LatexCommand nomenclature
2448 description "Tabulator key"
2454 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2456 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2457 \begin_inset space ~
2461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2463 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2470 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2474 , especially section
2475 \begin_inset space ~
2479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2481 reference "subsec:Lists"
2487 If you are still confused, look in the
2492 \begin_inset Newline newline
2500 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2501 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2505 \begin_layout Labeling
2506 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2510 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2511 LatexCommand nomenclature
2513 description "Escape key"
2520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2527 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2528 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2531 \begin_layout Labeling
2532 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2538 \begin_inset space ~
2542 \begin_inset space ~
2549 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2550 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2554 \begin_layout Standard
2555 There are three modifier keys:
2558 \begin_layout Labeling
2559 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2577 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2578 LatexCommand nomenclature
2580 description "Control key"
2584 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2585 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2589 \begin_layout Itemize
2598 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2601 \begin_layout Itemize
2610 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2613 \begin_layout Itemize
2622 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2626 \begin_layout Labeling
2627 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2645 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2646 LatexCommand nomenclature
2648 description "Shift key"
2652 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2653 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2656 \begin_layout Labeling
2657 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2675 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2676 LatexCommand nomenclature
2678 description "Alt or Meta key"
2682 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2683 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2684 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2690 \begin_inset Newline newline
2693 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2695 menu accelerator keys
2698 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2699 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2703 \begin_layout Standard
2704 For example, the sequence
2705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2711 \begin_inset space ~
2715 \begin_inset space ~
2721 \begin_inset space ~
2729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2748 \begin_inset space ~
2754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2764 \begin_layout Standard
2769 manual lists all other things bound to the
2777 \begin_layout Standard
2778 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2780 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2781 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2782 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2783 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2784 The \SpecialChar LyX
2785 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2786 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2787 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2789 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2805 followed by a capital
2812 \begin_layout Chapter
2815 \begin_inset Index idx
2818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2828 \begin_layout Section
2830 \begin_inset Index idx
2833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2842 \begin_layout Subsection
2846 \begin_layout Standard
2847 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2848 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2849 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2850 numbering schemes, and so on.
2851 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2852 and format the title of your document differently.
2855 \begin_layout Standard
2860 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2861 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2862 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2863 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2864 picks one for you by default.
2865 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2868 \begin_layout Subsection
2870 \begin_inset Index idx
2873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2882 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2889 \begin_layout Standard
2890 You can select a class using the
2892 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2893 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2897 \begin_inset Index idx
2900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2907 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2911 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2915 \begin_layout Standard
2916 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2921 \begin_layout Description
2922 Article for basic articles
2925 \begin_layout Description
2926 Report for basic reports
2929 \begin_layout Description
2930 Book for writing a book
2933 \begin_layout Description
2934 Letter for US-style letters
2937 \begin_layout Standard
2938 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2939 only uses if you have installed
2940 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2941 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2942 distributions will include
2944 Here are some of the classes.
2945 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2947 Special Document Classes
2956 \begin_layout Description
2957 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2960 \begin_layout Description
2961 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2965 \begin_layout Description
2966 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2970 \begin_layout Description
2971 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2972 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2973 There are three article layouts available.
2974 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2975 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2976 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2977 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2982 sequential numbering
2983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2986 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2987 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2988 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2989 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2992 \begin_layout Description
2993 Beamer Layout for presentations
2996 \begin_layout Description
2997 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2998 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2999 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3000 with \SpecialChar LyX
3004 \begin_layout Description
3005 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3008 \begin_layout Description
3010 \begin_inset space ~
3013 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3016 \begin_layout Description
3017 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3020 \begin_layout Description
3021 Foils Used to make transparencies
3024 \begin_layout Description
3025 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3026 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3027 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3028 with \SpecialChar LyX
3032 \begin_layout Description
3033 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3034 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3037 \begin_layout Description
3038 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3041 \begin_layout Description
3042 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3045 \begin_layout Description
3046 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3047 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3048 (Is used by this document.)
3051 \begin_layout Description
3052 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3055 \begin_layout Description
3056 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3059 \begin_layout Description
3064 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3065 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3067 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3071 \begin_layout Description
3072 Slides Used to make transparencies
3075 \begin_layout Description
3077 \begin_inset space ~
3080 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3081 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3084 \begin_layout Description
3085 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3088 \begin_layout Standard
3089 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3091 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3093 Special Document Classes
3100 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3101 of the document classes.
3104 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3108 \begin_layout Standard
3109 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3111 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3112 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3114 \begin_inset Index idx
3117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3134 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3135 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3137 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3140 \begin_layout Standard
3143 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3148 , are highly specialized.
3150 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3151 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3152 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3153 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3154 by some document class.
3155 There are just too many of them.
3156 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3159 \begin_layout Standard
3160 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3168 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3169 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3170 document class for a new file.
3172 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3175 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3182 manual for information on how to install them.
3183 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3189 \begin_layout Standard
3190 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3191 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3192 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3193 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3194 class files to be used for dissertation
3195 s submitted to those universities.
3196 The \SpecialChar LyX
3197 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3199 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3203 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3209 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3212 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3214 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3216 name "subsec:Modules"
3221 \begin_inset Index idx
3224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3233 \begin_layout Standard
3234 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3235 chosen document class.
3236 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3237 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3244 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3248 \begin_inset Index idx
3251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3258 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3262 \begin_layout Standard
3263 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3264 packages or file format converters that are not always
3265 installed by default.
3267 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3268 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3269 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3270 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3272 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3273 file without the missing prerequisites.
3274 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3275 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3278 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3282 \begin_inset Index idx
3285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3286 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3292 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3297 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3300 \begin_layout Standard
3301 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3309 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3311 will advise you about these things.
3319 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3321 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3323 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3328 \begin_inset Index idx
3331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3332 Document ! Local Layout
3340 \begin_layout Standard
3341 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3342 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3343 : They are intended to be used in
3344 a variety of different documents.
3345 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3346 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3347 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3348 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3349 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3351 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3369 manual for information on how to use it.
3372 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3376 \begin_layout Standard
3377 Each class has a default set of options.
3378 Here's a quick table describing them:
3381 \begin_layout Standard
3382 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3388 \begin_layout Standard
3390 \begin_inset Tabular
3391 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3392 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3393 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3394 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3395 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3396 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3397 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3851 \begin_layout Standard
3852 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3858 \begin_layout Standard
3859 You're probably also wondering what
3860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3864 \begin_inset space ~
3868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3872 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3873 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3878 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3883 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3893 headings, there are also
3901 headings, and so on.
3902 We will describe these headings fully in section
3903 \begin_inset space ~
3907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3909 reference "subsec:Headings"
3916 \begin_layout Subsection
3918 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3920 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3925 \begin_inset Index idx
3928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3935 \begin_inset Index idx
3938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3947 \begin_layout Standard
3948 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3950 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3957 \begin_inset space ~
3965 \begin_inset space ~
3970 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3972 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3973 doesn't support special options you want to
3974 use for your document.
3975 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3976 -class and its options, you have to read
3980 \begin_layout Standard
3984 \begin_inset space ~
3991 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3997 \begin_inset space ~
4002 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4003 You can choose between the following five options:
4006 \begin_layout Labeling
4007 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4012 Use default page style of current class.
4015 \begin_layout Labeling
4016 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4021 No page numbers or headings.
4024 \begin_layout Labeling
4025 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4033 \begin_layout Labeling
4034 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4039 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4040 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4041 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4042 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4045 \begin_layout Labeling
4046 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4051 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4052 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4058 \begin_inset Index idx
4061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4063 -packages ! fancyhdr
4069 How they are defined is explained in section
4070 \begin_inset space ~
4074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4076 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4083 \begin_layout Standard
4084 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4085 \begin_inset space ~
4089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4091 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4098 \begin_layout Subsection
4099 Paper Size and Orientation
4100 \begin_inset Index idx
4103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4104 Document ! Paper size
4110 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4112 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4119 \begin_layout Standard
4120 You can find the following options in the menu
4123 \begin_inset space ~
4130 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4134 \begin_inset Index idx
4137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4146 \begin_layout Labeling
4147 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4151 \begin_inset space ~
4156 What size paper to print on.
4161 \begin_layout Itemize
4167 \begin_layout Itemize
4173 \begin_layout Itemize
4179 \begin_layout Itemize
4185 \begin_layout Itemize
4188 US letter, US legal, US executive
4191 \begin_layout Itemize
4197 \begin_layout Itemize
4204 \begin_layout Labeling
4205 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4210 To choose whether to output as
4221 \begin_layout Labeling
4222 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4226 \begin_inset space ~
4231 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4232 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4235 \begin_layout Subsection
4237 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4239 name "subsec:Margins"
4244 \begin_inset Index idx
4247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4254 \begin_inset Index idx
4257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4266 \begin_layout Standard
4267 Paper margins are set in the menu
4269 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4273 \begin_inset Index idx
4276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4285 \begin_layout Standard
4286 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4287 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4288 the paper format and the font size into account.
4291 \begin_layout Subsection
4295 \begin_layout Standard
4296 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4302 That includes the paragraph environments.
4303 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4304 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4305 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4307 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4316 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4318 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4319 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4320 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4323 \begin_layout Section
4324 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4325 \begin_inset Index idx
4328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4329 Paragraph ! Indentation
4337 \begin_layout Subsection
4339 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4341 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4348 \begin_layout Standard
4349 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4350 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4353 \begin_layout Standard
4354 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4355 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4356 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4357 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4361 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4367 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4368 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4369 language than English.
4371 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4374 \begin_layout Standard
4375 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4376 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4377 into \SpecialChar LyX
4379 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4382 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4384 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4385 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4386 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4393 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4394 goes to produce a printable file.
4399 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4401 gives you the ability globally to change
4405 these pre-coded spacings.
4406 We will explain more later.
4409 \begin_layout Subsection
4410 Paragraph Separation
4411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4413 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4418 \begin_inset Index idx
4421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4422 Paragraph ! Separation
4430 \begin_layout Standard
4438 \begin_inset space ~
4446 \begin_inset space ~
4453 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4457 \begin_inset Index idx
4460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4466 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4469 \begin_layout Subsection
4473 \begin_layout Standard
4474 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4477 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4479 \begin_inset space ~
4484 dialog and toggle the
4487 \begin_inset space ~
4492 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4495 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4499 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4500 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4504 \begin_layout Standard
4505 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4506 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4509 \begin_layout Subsection
4511 \begin_inset Index idx
4514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4515 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4523 \begin_layout Standard
4526 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4530 \begin_inset Index idx
4533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4542 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4546 \begin_inset space ~
4555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4556 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4562 \begin_inset Index idx
4565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4567 -packages ! setspace
4572 installed to use this feature.
4577 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4579 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4581 \begin_inset space ~
4586 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4587 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4590 \begin_layout Section
4591 Paragraph Environments
4592 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4594 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4599 \begin_inset Index idx
4602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4603 Paragraph ! Environments
4609 \begin_inset Index idx
4612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4613 Paragraph environments|(
4621 \begin_layout Subsection
4625 \begin_layout Standard
4626 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4629 \begin_layout Standard
4638 } \SpecialChar ldots
4648 \begin_inset Newline newline
4651 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4653 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4654 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4655 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4664 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4667 \begin_layout Standard
4668 A paragraph environment is simply a
4669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4676 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4677 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4678 scheme, labels, and so on.
4679 Additionally, you can
4680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4687 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4688 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4689 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4690 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4692 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4694 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4697 \begin_layout Standard
4698 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4699 \begin_inset Graphics
4700 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4706 at the left end of the toolbar.
4708 will change the environment of the
4712 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4713 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4714 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4718 \begin_layout Standard
4727 create a new paragraph using the
4731 paragraph environment.
4733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4740 because if you are in one of these environments:
4743 \begin_layout Itemize
4749 \begin_layout Itemize
4755 \begin_layout Itemize
4761 \begin_layout Itemize
4767 \begin_layout Itemize
4773 \begin_layout Itemize
4779 \begin_layout Itemize
4785 \begin_layout Standard
4787 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4791 , rather than resetting it to
4796 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4797 \begin_inset space ~
4801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4803 reference "sec:Nesting"
4810 \begin_layout Subsection
4814 \begin_layout Standard
4815 The default paragraph environment is
4820 It creates a plain paragraph.
4822 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4823 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4824 this manual) are in the
4831 \begin_layout Standard
4832 You can nest a paragraph using the
4836 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4844 \begin_layout Subsection
4846 \begin_inset Index idx
4849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4858 \begin_layout Standard
4859 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4860 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4869 for thanks or contact information.
4870 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4871 places all of this on a separate page
4872 along with today's date.
4873 For other types of documents, the title
4874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4881 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4885 \begin_layout Standard
4887 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4901 Here's how you use them:
4904 \begin_layout Itemize
4905 Put the title of your document in the
4912 \begin_layout Itemize
4913 Put the author name in the
4920 \begin_layout Itemize
4921 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4922 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4928 Note that using this environment is optional.
4929 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4930 will automatically insert today's date.
4931 If you don't want a date, use the option
4933 Suppress default date on front page
4937 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4938 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4940 \begin_inset space ~
4948 \begin_layout Standard
4949 You can use footnotes to insert
4950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4957 or contact information.
4960 \begin_layout Subsection
4962 \begin_inset Index idx
4965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4972 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4974 name "subsec:Headings"
4981 \begin_layout Standard
4982 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4984 takes care of the numbering for you.
4987 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4989 \begin_inset Index idx
4992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4993 Section headings ! Numbered
5001 \begin_layout Standard
5002 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5006 \begin_layout Enumerate
5012 \begin_layout Enumerate
5018 \begin_layout Enumerate
5024 \begin_layout Enumerate
5030 \begin_layout Enumerate
5036 \begin_layout Enumerate
5042 \begin_layout Enumerate
5048 \begin_layout Standard
5050 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5051 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5052 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5055 \begin_layout Standard
5056 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5057 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5058 You group the book into chapters.
5060 does a similar grouping:
5063 \begin_layout Itemize
5068 is divided into either
5079 \begin_layout Itemize
5091 \begin_layout Itemize
5103 \begin_layout Itemize
5115 \begin_layout Itemize
5127 \begin_layout Itemize
5139 \begin_layout Standard
5140 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5148 Not all document types use the
5152 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5157 is the top-level heading.
5165 \begin_layout Standard
5170 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5171 labels it with its number,
5172 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5174 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5188 \begin_inset Index idx
5191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5192 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5200 \begin_layout Standard
5201 The unnumbered section headings have a
5202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5209 at the end of their name.
5210 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5211 the table of contents, see section
5212 \begin_inset space ~
5216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5225 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5226 Changing the Numbering
5227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5229 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5236 \begin_layout Standard
5237 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5238 in the Table of Contents.
5239 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5241 Just as certain classes start with
5255 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5265 This is something you can change.
5268 \begin_layout Standard
5271 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5275 \begin_inset Index idx
5278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5287 \begin_inset space ~
5291 \begin_inset space ~
5296 you will see two counters.
5301 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5302 numbers a section heading.
5303 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5307 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5308 Short Titles of Headings
5309 \begin_inset Index idx
5312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5313 Section headings ! Short titles
5319 \begin_inset Argument 1
5322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5331 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5338 \begin_layout Standard
5339 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5340 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5341 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5342 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5345 \begin_layout Standard
5347 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5348 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5349 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5350 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5353 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5355 \begin_inset space ~
5361 This will insert a box labeled
5362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5366 \begin_inset space ~
5370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5373 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5374 This also works for captions inside floats.
5375 There can only be one short title per title.
5378 \begin_layout Standard
5379 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5382 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5386 \begin_layout Standard
5387 The following information applies to all section headings:
5390 \begin_layout Itemize
5391 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5394 \begin_layout Itemize
5395 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5398 \begin_layout Itemize
5399 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5402 \begin_layout Itemize
5403 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5406 \begin_layout Subsection
5410 \begin_layout Standard
5412 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5426 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5427 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5428 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5429 the text they contain.
5430 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5438 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5441 \begin_layout Standard
5442 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5451 when you start a new paragraph.
5452 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5456 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5457 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5458 have to change back to the
5462 environment yourself.
5465 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5467 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5474 \begin_inset Index idx
5477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5486 \begin_layout Standard
5487 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5488 time for the differences.
5497 are identical except for one difference:
5501 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5510 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5513 \begin_layout Standard
5514 Here's an example of the
5527 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5529 See – no indentation!
5533 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5534 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5535 the other paragraph.
5538 \begin_layout Standard
5539 Here's another example, this time in the
5546 \begin_layout Quotation
5552 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5553 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5554 the first line, then
5558 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5562 you were quoting other text.
5565 \begin_layout Quotation
5566 Here's a new paragraph.
5567 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5568 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5571 \begin_layout Standard
5572 As the examples show,
5576 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5577 They should put quotes in the
5582 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5586 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5589 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5591 \begin_inset Index idx
5594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5601 \begin_inset Index idx
5604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5620 \begin_layout Standard
5625 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5631 \begin_inset Newline newline
5634 Which I did not rehearse!
5638 It could be much worse.
5639 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5641 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5642 indented a bit more than the first.
5643 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5649 \begin_inset Newline newline
5652 And make things look fine
5653 \begin_inset Newline newline
5659 arg "newline-insert newline"
5665 \begin_layout Standard
5670 does not indent both margins.
5671 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5672 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5675 arg "newline-insert newline"
5681 \begin_layout Subsection
5683 \begin_inset Index idx
5686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5693 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5702 \begin_layout Standard
5704 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5714 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5715 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5724 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5725 lets you provide your own label.
5726 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5727 describing some general features of all four of them.
5730 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5734 \begin_layout Standard
5735 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5737 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5738 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5747 reset the environment to
5751 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5752 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5753 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5757 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5761 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5768 \begin_layout Standard
5769 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5770 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5771 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5773 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5774 you read all of section
5775 \begin_inset space ~
5779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5781 reference "sec:Nesting"
5788 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5790 \begin_inset Index idx
5793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5800 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5809 \begin_layout Standard
5810 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5814 paragraph environment.
5815 It has the following properties:
5818 \begin_layout Itemize
5819 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5823 \begin_layout Itemize
5825 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5828 \begin_layout Itemize
5829 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5833 \begin_layout Itemize
5834 The items can have any length.
5836 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5837 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5844 \begin_layout Itemize
5849 environment inside another
5853 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5857 \begin_layout Itemize
5858 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5861 \begin_layout Itemize
5863 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5866 \begin_layout Itemize
5868 \begin_inset space ~
5872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5874 reference "sec:Nesting"
5878 for a full explanation of nesting.
5882 \begin_layout Standard
5883 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5892 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5895 \begin_layout Standard
5896 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5897 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5900 \begin_layout Itemize
5901 The label for the first level
5905 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5909 \begin_layout Itemize
5910 The label for the second level is a dash.
5914 \begin_layout Itemize
5915 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5919 \begin_layout Itemize
5920 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5924 \begin_layout Itemize
5925 Back out to the third level.
5929 \begin_layout Itemize
5930 Back to the second level.
5934 \begin_layout Itemize
5935 Back to the outermost level.
5938 \begin_layout Standard
5939 These are the default labels for an
5944 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5946 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5949 dialog in the submenu
5954 \begin_inset Index idx
5957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5963 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5967 \begin_layout Standard
5968 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5969 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5971 \begin_inset space ~
5975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5977 reference "sec:Nesting"
5984 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5986 \begin_inset Index idx
5989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5996 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5998 name "sec:Enumerate"
6005 \begin_layout Standard
6010 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6011 It has these properties:
6014 \begin_layout Enumerate
6015 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6019 \begin_layout Enumerate
6020 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6024 \begin_layout Enumerate
6026 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6029 \begin_layout Enumerate
6034 environment resets the counter to one.
6037 \begin_layout Enumerate
6050 \begin_layout Enumerate
6051 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6052 Items can have any length.
6055 \begin_layout Enumerate
6056 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6059 \begin_layout Enumerate
6060 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6063 \begin_layout Enumerate
6064 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6068 \begin_layout Standard
6077 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6079 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6080 labels the four different levels in an
6087 \begin_layout Enumerate
6088 The first level of an
6092 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6096 \begin_layout Enumerate
6097 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6101 \begin_layout Enumerate
6102 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6106 \begin_layout Enumerate
6107 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6110 \begin_layout Enumerate
6111 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6116 \begin_layout Enumerate
6117 Back to the third level
6121 \begin_layout Enumerate
6122 Back to the second level.
6126 \begin_layout Enumerate
6127 Back to the outermost level.
6130 \begin_layout Standard
6131 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6135 environment, see section
6136 \begin_inset space ~
6140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6142 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6147 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6151 \begin_layout Standard
6152 There is more to nesting
6156 environments than we've stated here.
6157 You should read section
6158 \begin_inset space ~
6162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6164 reference "sec:Nesting"
6168 to learn more about nesting.
6171 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6173 \begin_inset Index idx
6176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6185 \begin_layout Standard
6186 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6190 list has no fixed label.
6191 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6200 of the first line as the label.
6204 \begin_layout Description
6205 Example: This is an example of the
6212 \begin_layout Standard
6214 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6218 \begin_layout Standard
6220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6227 it is meant that the first usage of the
6231 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6233 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6241 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6246 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6247 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6249 \begin_inset space ~
6255 \begin_inset space ~
6259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6261 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6265 for more information.) Here is an example:
6268 \begin_layout Description
6270 \begin_inset space ~
6273 Example: This one shows how to use a
6276 \begin_inset space ~
6288 \begin_layout Description
6289 Usage: You should use the
6293 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6294 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6296 It's not a good idea to use a
6300 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6301 You're better off using
6313 paragraphs into them.
6316 \begin_layout Description
6317 Nesting: You can nest
6321 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6325 \begin_layout Standard
6326 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6327 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6328 them from the first line.
6331 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6333 \begin_inset Index idx
6336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6345 \begin_layout Standard
6350 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6351 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6355 \begin_layout Standard
6364 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6366 Here are its properties:
6369 \begin_layout Labeling
6370 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6372 \begin_inset space ~
6375 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6384 of each line as the item label.
6389 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6390 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6391 space as described above.
6394 \begin_layout Labeling
6395 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6396 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6397 uses different margins for the item label and the
6398 body of the item text.
6399 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6400 label width plus a little extra space.
6404 \begin_layout Labeling
6405 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6407 \begin_inset space ~
6410 width \SpecialChar LyX
6411 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6412 If the label width is larger, the label
6413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6420 into the first line.
6421 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6422 margin of the rest of the item text.
6425 \begin_layout Labeling
6426 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6428 \begin_inset space ~
6431 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6436 environment has the same left margin.
6437 \begin_inset Newline newline
6440 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6443 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6445 \begin_inset space ~
6450 dialog (toolbar button
6453 arg "layout-paragraph"
6460 \begin_inset space ~
6465 determines the default label width.
6466 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6475 multiple times instead.
6476 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6486 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6489 \begin_inset space ~
6494 every time you alter a label in a
6499 \begin_inset Newline newline
6502 The predefined default width is the length of
6503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6511 \begin_inset space ~
6517 \begin_layout Standard
6522 list the same way as the
6526 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6532 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6536 \begin_layout Standard
6541 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6542 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6544 \begin_inset space ~
6548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6550 reference "sec:Nesting"
6554 to learn about nesting.
6557 \begin_layout Standard
6558 There is yet another feature of the
6562 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6563 left-justifies the item labels by
6565 You can use additional
6569 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6570 justifies the item label.
6575 are documented in section
6576 \begin_inset space ~
6580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6582 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6587 Here are some examples:
6590 \begin_layout Labeling
6591 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6592 Left The default for
6599 \begin_layout Labeling
6600 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6601 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6608 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6611 \begin_layout Labeling
6612 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6613 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6617 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6624 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6627 \begin_layout Subsection
6629 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6631 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6636 \begin_inset Index idx
6639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6648 \begin_layout Standard
6649 The features described in this section require that the module
6651 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6653 is loaded in the document settings.
6654 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6660 \begin_inset Index idx
6663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6665 -packages ! enumitem
6673 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6674 Custom Enumerate Lists
6675 \begin_inset Index idx
6678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6679 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6687 \begin_layout Standard
6689 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6692 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6695 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6696 There you add the command
6699 \begin_layout Standard
6707 \begin_layout Standard
6719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6720 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6721 Code, look at section
6722 \begin_inset space ~
6726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6728 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6741 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6748 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6749 For capital Roman numerals replace
6761 in the command above.
6762 For Arabic numerals use
6770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6777 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6792 \begin_layout Standard
6794 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6802 You can only number 26
6803 \begin_inset space ~
6806 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6814 \begin_layout Standard
6815 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6816 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6819 \begin_layout Standard
6820 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6823 \begin_layout Enumerate
6824 \begin_inset Argument 1
6827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6853 \begin_layout Enumerate
6854 \begin_inset Argument 1
6857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6880 \begin_layout Enumerate
6885 \begin_layout Enumerate
6886 \begin_inset Argument 1
6889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6913 \begin_layout Enumerate
6914 \begin_inset Argument 1
6917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6943 \begin_layout Standard
6944 For this list these commands were used:
6947 \begin_layout Standard
6958 \begin_inset Newline newline
6966 \begin_inset Newline newline
6974 \begin_inset Newline newline
6984 \begin_layout Standard
6991 makes the label emphasized and
7000 \begin_layout Standard
7001 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7009 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7010 lists until you change the definition.
7018 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7020 \begin_inset Index idx
7023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7024 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7032 \begin_layout Standard
7033 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7036 \begin_layout Enumerate
7037 \begin_inset Argument 1
7040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7059 \begin_inset Note Note
7062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7063 goes back to default numbering
7071 \begin_layout Enumerate
7075 \begin_layout Standard
7079 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7083 \begin_layout Standard
7084 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7089 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7090 to indicate that it is a resumed
7091 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7092 , but in the output.
7095 \begin_layout Standard
7096 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7104 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7113 \begin_layout Standard
7114 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7116 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7117 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7118 of a normal enumeration.
7119 There, insert the command
7122 \begin_layout Standard
7128 \begin_layout Standard
7133 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7137 \begin_layout Enumerate
7141 \begin_layout Enumerate
7145 \begin_layout Standard
7146 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7149 \begin_layout Enumerate
7150 \begin_inset Argument 1
7153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7169 This enumeration starts at 4
7172 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7174 \begin_inset Index idx
7177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7186 \begin_layout Standard
7187 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7189 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7192 \begin_layout Itemize
7196 \begin_layout Itemize
7197 with standard spacing
7200 \begin_layout Standard
7201 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7203 Add there the command
7207 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7210 \begin_layout Itemize
7211 \begin_inset Argument 1
7214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7233 \begin_layout Itemize
7237 \begin_layout Itemize
7241 \begin_layout Standard
7242 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7249 \begin_inset Index idx
7252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7254 -packages ! enumitem
7260 For more information see its documentation,
7261 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7270 \begin_layout Standard
7271 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7273 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7274 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7275 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7278 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7281 \begin_layout Enumerate
7282 \begin_inset Argument 1
7285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7293 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7306 \begin_layout Enumerate
7307 with negative indentation
7310 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7311 Further Customization
7312 \begin_inset Index idx
7315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7316 Lists ! Customization
7324 \begin_layout Standard
7325 You can also change the style of description lists.
7329 \begin_layout Standard
7335 \begin_layout Standard
7336 changes the description label font, the command
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7345 \begin_layout Standard
7346 sets the list style.
7349 \begin_layout Standard
7350 An example where the command
7353 \begin_layout Standard
7358 itshape, style=nextline
7361 \begin_layout Standard
7365 \begin_layout Description
7367 \begin_inset space ~
7371 \begin_inset Argument 1
7374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7380 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7382 itshape, style=nextline
7392 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7393 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7397 \begin_layout Description
7399 \begin_inset space ~
7402 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7403 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7404 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7407 \begin_layout Standard
7408 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7414 \begin_inset Index idx
7417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7419 -packages ! enumitem
7425 For more information see its documentation
7426 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7435 \begin_layout Subsection
7437 \begin_inset Index idx
7440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7449 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7451 \begin_inset space ~
7454 Address: An Overview
7457 \begin_layout Standard
7458 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7459 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7467 \begin_inset space ~
7473 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7474 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7475 gags on the document.
7476 In contrast, you can use the
7483 \begin_inset space ~
7488 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7489 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7493 \begin_layout Standard
7494 Of course, you're not limited to using
7501 \begin_inset space ~
7510 \begin_inset space ~
7515 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7516 some European academic papers.
7519 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7521 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7523 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7530 \begin_layout Standard
7535 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7536 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7540 \begin_inset space ~
7545 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7546 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7547 Here's an example of each:
7550 \begin_layout Right Address
7552 \begin_inset Newline newline
7556 \begin_inset Newline newline
7560 \begin_inset Newline newline
7563 When is it? What is today?
7566 \begin_layout Standard
7570 \begin_inset space ~
7576 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7578 the largest block of text on a single line.
7579 Here's an example of the
7586 \begin_layout Address
7588 \begin_inset Newline newline
7591 Where do I send this
7592 \begin_inset Newline newline
7595 Your post office and country
7598 \begin_layout Standard
7599 As you can see, both
7606 \begin_inset space ~
7611 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7616 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7617 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7623 This makes sense, since
7631 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7632 Thus, you have to use
7639 arg "newline-insert newline"
7644 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7645 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7647 \begin_inset space ~
7651 \begin_inset space ~
7656 ) to start a new line in an
7663 \begin_inset space ~
7671 \begin_layout Subsection
7675 \begin_layout Standard
7676 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7677 or list of references.
7679 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7682 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7684 \begin_inset Index idx
7687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7696 \begin_layout Standard
7701 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7702 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7703 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7704 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7718 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7719 The book document classes ignores the
7723 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7727 in a letter document class.
7730 \begin_layout Standard
7735 environment does several things for you.
7736 First, it puts the centered label
7737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7745 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7747 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7748 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7749 the subsequent text.
7750 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7752 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7756 \begin_layout Standard
7757 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7761 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7762 The new paragraph will still be in the
7767 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7768 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7771 \begin_layout Standard
7772 \begin_inset Float figure
7777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7779 \begin_inset Graphics
7780 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7788 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7791 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7793 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7814 \begin_layout Standard
7815 We would love to demonstrate the
7819 environment, but since this document is in the
7820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7827 class, we can't do this.
7828 We inserted it therefore as figure
7829 \begin_inset space ~
7833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7835 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7840 If you have never heard of an
7841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7848 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7851 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7853 \begin_inset Index idx
7856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7865 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7872 \begin_layout Standard
7877 environment is used to list references.
7878 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7879 only use it at the end of the document.
7891 \begin_layout Standard
7892 When you first open a
7896 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7897 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7913 depending on the document class.
7914 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7915 Each paragraph of the
7919 environment is a bibliography entry.
7924 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7925 Each new paragraph is still in the
7932 \begin_layout Standard
7933 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7934 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7936 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7938 handling, have a look at section
7939 \begin_inset space ~
7943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7945 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7952 \begin_layout Subsection
7953 Special Environments
7956 \begin_layout Standard
7958 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7959 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7962 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7967 \begin_inset Index idx
7970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7978 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7980 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7987 \begin_layout Standard
7993 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7995 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8000 key as a fixed whitespace.
8004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8017 \begin_inset space ~
8022 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8040 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8043 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8046 arg "newline-insert newline"
8063 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8064 So, when you finish using the
8069 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8070 Also, you can nest the
8075 environment inside of others.
8078 \begin_layout Standard
8079 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8082 \begin_layout Itemize
8086 arg "newline-insert newline"
8089 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8090 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8094 \begin_inset space \space{}
8104 arg "newline-insert newline"
8110 \begin_layout Itemize
8114 arg "newline-insert newline"
8124 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8130 \begin_layout Itemize
8131 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8132 You must put at least one
8136 in any line you want blank.
8137 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8141 \begin_layout Itemize
8142 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8146 since that will insert
8151 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8154 arg "self-insert \""
8160 \begin_layout Standard
8164 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8168 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8172 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8176 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8180 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8181 printf("Hello World!
8186 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8190 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8194 \begin_layout Standard
8195 This is just the standard
8196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8207 \begin_layout Standard
8213 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8215 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8216 as if you used a typewriter.
8217 \begin_inset Index idx
8220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8221 Paragraph environments|)
8226 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8229 Program Code Listings
8234 \begin_inset space ~
8242 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8246 \begin_inset Index idx
8249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8258 \begin_layout Standard
8263 environment is similar to the
8268 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8269 computer console text.
8274 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8288 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8289 you can have empty lines.
8302 \begin_layout Itemize
8303 have a certain language and a text style
8306 \begin_layout Itemize
8307 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8308 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8309 and \SpecialChar TeX
8313 \begin_layout Standard
8314 Because of these properties
8318 works like a typewriter.
8322 \begin_layout Verbatim
8327 \begin_layout Verbatim
8331 The following 2 lines are empty:
8334 \begin_layout Verbatim
8338 \begin_layout Verbatim
8342 \begin_layout Verbatim
8344 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8349 \begin_layout Standard
8354 environment is identical to
8358 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8359 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8366 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8371 \begin_layout Section
8372 Nesting Environments
8373 \begin_inset Index idx
8376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8377 Nesting ! Environments
8383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8392 \begin_layout Subsection
8396 \begin_layout Standard
8398 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8400 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8402 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8404 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8416 \begin_layout Enumerate
8420 \begin_layout Enumerate
8425 \begin_layout Enumerate
8429 \begin_layout Enumerate
8434 \begin_layout Enumerate
8438 \begin_layout Standard
8439 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8440 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8442 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8444 \begin_inset space ~
8448 \begin_inset space ~
8456 \begin_inset space ~
8460 \begin_inset space ~
8465 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8467 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8470 arg "depth-increment"
8476 arg "depth-decrement"
8490 arg "depth-increment"
8496 arg "depth-decrement"
8500 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8501 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8505 \begin_layout Standard
8506 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8507 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8508 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8509 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8510 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8513 \begin_layout Standard
8514 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8516 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8518 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8521 \begin_layout Subsection
8522 What You Can and Can't Nest
8525 \begin_layout Standard
8526 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8527 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8530 \begin_layout Standard
8531 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8532 than a simple yes or no.
8533 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8536 \begin_layout Itemize
8537 Completely unnestable
8540 \begin_layout Itemize
8541 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8545 \begin_layout Itemize
8546 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8550 \begin_layout Standard
8551 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8552 environments have them:
8555 \begin_layout Description
8556 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8557 Can't nest into them.
8561 \begin_layout Itemize
8567 \begin_layout Itemize
8573 \begin_layout Itemize
8579 \begin_layout Itemize
8585 \begin_layout Itemize
8592 \begin_layout Description
8594 \begin_inset space ~
8597 Nestable You can nest them.
8598 You can nest other things into them.
8602 \begin_layout Itemize
8608 \begin_layout Itemize
8614 \begin_layout Itemize
8620 \begin_layout Itemize
8626 \begin_layout Itemize
8632 \begin_layout Itemize
8638 \begin_layout Itemize
8644 \begin_layout Itemize
8651 \begin_layout Itemize
8657 \begin_layout Itemize
8664 \begin_layout Description
8665 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8666 You can't nest anything into them.
8670 \begin_layout Itemize
8676 \begin_layout Itemize
8682 \begin_layout Itemize
8688 \begin_layout Itemize
8694 \begin_layout Itemize
8700 \begin_layout Itemize
8706 \begin_layout Itemize
8712 \begin_layout Itemize
8718 \begin_layout Itemize
8724 \begin_layout Itemize
8730 \begin_layout Itemize
8736 \begin_layout Itemize
8742 \begin_layout Itemize
8748 \begin_layout Itemize
8752 \begin_inset space ~
8758 \begin_layout Itemize
8765 \begin_layout Standard
8766 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8774 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8784 \begin_inset space ~
8787 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8788 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8789 nested section headings violate this.
8797 \begin_layout Subsection
8798 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8799 \begin_inset Index idx
8802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8803 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8811 \begin_layout Standard
8812 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8813 affected by nesting anyhow.
8817 \begin_layout Itemize
8821 \begin_layout Itemize
8825 \begin_layout Itemize
8829 \begin_layout Standard
8831 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8839 Figures and tables in
8843 are not affected by this.
8848 Have a look at section
8849 \begin_inset space ~
8853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8855 reference "sec:Floats"
8859 for more information about
8866 \begin_layout Standard
8868 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8869 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8873 \begin_layout Standard
8874 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8882 of its own, it behaves just like a
8883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8890 paragraph environment.
8891 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8895 \begin_layout Standard
8896 Here's an example with a table:
8899 \begin_layout Enumerate
8904 \begin_layout Enumerate
8905 This is (a) and it's nested.
8909 \begin_layout Standard
8910 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8916 \begin_layout Standard
8918 \begin_inset Tabular
8919 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8920 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8921 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8922 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9006 \begin_layout Standard
9007 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9014 \begin_layout Enumerate
9016 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9020 \begin_layout Enumerate
9024 \begin_layout Standard
9025 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9028 \begin_layout Enumerate
9033 \begin_layout Enumerate
9034 This is (a) and it's nested.
9038 \begin_layout Standard
9039 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9045 \begin_layout Standard
9047 \begin_inset Tabular
9048 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9049 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9050 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9051 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9135 \begin_layout Standard
9136 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9142 \begin_layout Enumerate
9149 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9152 \begin_layout Enumerate
9156 \begin_layout Standard
9157 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9161 \begin_layout Standard
9162 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9165 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9168 \begin_layout Enumerate
9173 \begin_layout Enumerate
9174 This is (a) and it's nested.
9177 \begin_layout Standard
9178 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9184 \begin_layout Standard
9186 \begin_inset Tabular
9187 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9188 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9189 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9190 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9275 \begin_layout Standard
9276 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9282 \begin_layout Enumerate
9284 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9291 \begin_layout Enumerate
9295 \begin_layout Standard
9296 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9302 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9303 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9307 \begin_layout Subsection
9308 Usage and General Features
9311 \begin_layout Standard
9312 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9313 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9322 is the innermost possible depth.
9323 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9326 \begin_layout Enumerate
9327 level #1 – outermost
9331 \begin_layout Enumerate
9336 \begin_layout Enumerate
9341 \begin_layout Enumerate
9346 \begin_layout Itemize
9351 \begin_layout Itemize
9360 \begin_layout Standard
9361 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9362 both of them in the example.
9363 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9373 For example, if we tried to nest another
9378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9385 , we would get errors.
9388 \begin_layout Subsection
9390 \begin_inset Index idx
9393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9402 \begin_layout Standard
9403 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9404 We have several examples of nested environments.
9405 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9409 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9410 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9413 \begin_layout Labeling
9414 \labelwidthstring MMM
9415 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9424 \begin_layout Labeling
9425 \labelwidthstring MMM
9426 #2-a This is level #2.
9427 We created it by using
9430 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9436 arg "depth-increment"
9443 \begin_layout Labeling
9444 \labelwidthstring MMM
9445 #3-a This is level #3.
9446 This time, we just enter
9453 arg "depth-increment"
9457 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9461 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9467 arg "depth-increment"
9474 \begin_layout Standard
9479 environment, nested inside of
9480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9488 So, it's at level #4.
9489 We did this by entering
9492 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9498 arg "depth-increment"
9501 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9506 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9522 \begin_layout Standard
9527 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9530 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9536 \begin_layout Labeling
9537 \labelwidthstring MMM
9538 #4-a This is level #4.
9542 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9545 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9550 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9554 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9559 keep nesting things inside
9560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9571 \begin_layout Labeling
9572 \labelwidthstring MMM
9573 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9578 \begin_layout Labeling
9579 \labelwidthstring MMM
9580 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9581 and this is level #6.
9582 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9586 \begin_layout Labeling
9587 \labelwidthstring MMM
9588 #5-b Back to level #5.
9592 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9598 arg "depth-decrement"
9605 \begin_layout Labeling
9606 \labelwidthstring MMM
9610 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9616 arg "depth-decrement"
9619 , we're back at level #4.
9623 \begin_layout Labeling
9624 \labelwidthstring MMM
9625 #3-b Back to level #3.
9626 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9630 \begin_layout Labeling
9631 \labelwidthstring MMM
9632 #2-b Back to level #2.
9637 \begin_layout Labeling
9638 \labelwidthstring MMM
9639 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9640 After this sentence, we will enter
9644 and change the paragraph environment back to
9651 \begin_layout Standard
9652 We could have also used the
9668 environment in place of the
9673 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9676 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9677 Example 2: Inheritance
9680 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9681 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9684 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9693 arg "depth-increment"
9697 \begin_inset Newline newline
9700 which, we will change to the
9708 \begin_layout Enumerate
9713 environment, at level #2.
9716 \begin_layout Enumerate
9717 Notice how the nested
9721 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9725 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9729 \begin_layout Standard
9730 We ended this example by entering
9735 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9739 and reset the nesting depth by using
9742 arg "depth-decrement"
9748 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9749 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9758 \begin_inset Argument 1
9761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9762 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9770 \begin_layout Enumerate
9771 This is level #1, in an
9775 paragraph environment.
9776 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9780 \begin_layout Enumerate
9785 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9791 arg "depth-increment"
9795 Now, what happens if we nest an
9799 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9800 label be? An asterisk?
9804 \begin_layout Itemize
9814 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9815 So, its label is a bullet.
9816 (We got here by using
9819 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9825 arg "depth-increment"
9828 , then changing the environment to
9836 \begin_layout Itemize
9837 Here's level #4, produced using
9840 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9846 arg "depth-increment"
9850 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9855 \begin_layout Enumerate
9858 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9863 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9867 , because we are in the
9875 environment (that is, it is an
9890 \begin_layout Enumerate
9895 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9896 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9900 \begin_layout Enumerate
9901 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9904 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9907 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9910 \begin_layout Enumerate
9914 arg "depth-decrement"
9917 to decrease the depth after the next
9920 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9927 \begin_layout Enumerate
9929 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9934 \begin_layout Enumerate
9936 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9937 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9941 \begin_layout Enumerate
9942 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9951 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9956 reset the counter for the label.
9960 \begin_layout Enumerate
9964 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9970 arg "depth-decrement"
9973 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9974 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9975 into the twofold-nested
9983 \begin_layout Enumerate
9984 The same thing happens if we do another
9987 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9993 arg "depth-decrement"
9996 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9999 \begin_layout Standard
10000 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10005 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10016 The number of other
10020 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10027 The same rule applies for the
10031 environment, as well.
10034 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10035 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10038 \begin_layout Enumerate
10039 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10040 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10041 the same detail with how we did it.
10050 \begin_layout Standard
10058 arg "depth-increment"
10065 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10066 the example in parentheses someplace.
10067 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10068 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10069 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10073 \begin_layout Enumerate
10078 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10082 \begin_layout Verse
10083 Now we will add verse.
10084 \begin_inset Newline newline
10087 It will get much worse.
10088 \begin_inset Newline newline
10098 arg "depth-increment"
10108 \begin_layout Verse
10109 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10110 \begin_inset Newline newline
10113 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10114 \begin_inset Newline newline
10120 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10128 \begin_layout Verse
10129 Here comes a table:
10133 \begin_layout Standard
10134 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10140 \begin_layout Standard
10142 \begin_inset Tabular
10143 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10144 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10145 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10146 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10231 \begin_layout Verse
10235 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10245 arg "depth-increment"
10251 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10257 \begin_inset Newline newline
10265 arg "depth-decrement"
10272 \begin_layout Enumerate
10277 : level #1) This is another item.
10278 Note that selecting a
10282 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10283 3 times to put the table inside the
10291 \begin_layout Quotation
10292 We're now ending the
10296 list and changing to
10301 We're still at level #1.
10302 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10303 The next set of paragraphs is a
10304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10311 We will nest both the
10318 \begin_inset space ~
10323 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10327 for the letter body.
10331 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10334 to preserve the depth.
10335 Remember that you need to use
10338 arg "newline-insert newline"
10341 to create multiple lines inside the
10348 \begin_inset space ~
10358 \begin_layout Right Address
10360 \begin_inset Newline newline
10363 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10364 \begin_inset Newline newline
10370 \begin_layout Address
10372 \begin_inset space ~
10378 \begin_layout Quotation
10379 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10380 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10383 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10384 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10385 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10386 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10387 as soon as possible.
10388 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10391 \begin_layout Quotation
10392 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10393 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10394 with your order, along with payment.
10397 \begin_layout Quotation
10398 We thank you again for your patience.
10401 \begin_layout Address
10403 \begin_inset Newline newline
10410 \begin_layout Quotation
10411 That ends that example!
10414 \begin_layout Standard
10415 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10416 gives you a lot of power with just
10418 We could have easily nested an
10439 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10442 \begin_layout Subsection
10444 \begin_inset Index idx
10447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10448 Nesting ! Separation
10454 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10456 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10463 \begin_layout Standard
10464 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10466 For example you need two different enumerations:
10469 \begin_layout Enumerate
10474 \begin_layout Enumerate
10479 \begin_layout Enumerate
10483 \begin_layout Standard
10484 \begin_inset Separator plain
10490 \begin_layout Itemize
10496 \begin_layout Standard
10497 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10503 \begin_layout Enumerate
10507 \begin_layout Enumerate
10511 \begin_layout Enumerate
10515 \begin_layout Standard
10516 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10517 list item and use the menu
10519 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10520 Start New Environment
10523 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10524 ) and behind it the new list.
10527 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10528 Start New Parent Environment
10530 only appears if the item is nested.
10531 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10535 \begin_layout Standard
10536 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10537 (red arrow in LyX).
10538 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10539 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10542 \begin_layout Standard
10543 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10546 arg "paragraph-break"
10553 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10556 \begin_layout Section
10557 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10558 \begin_inset Index idx
10561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10570 \begin_layout Standard
10571 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10572 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10574 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10575 be broken at the end of a line.
10576 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10580 \begin_layout Subsection
10582 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10584 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10589 \begin_inset Index idx
10592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10601 \begin_layout Standard
10602 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10603 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10604 ) not to break the line at
10606 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10609 \begin_layout Quote
10610 Further documentation is given in section
10611 \begin_inset Newline newline
10615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10617 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10625 \begin_layout Standard
10626 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10641 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10650 A protected space is set with
10652 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10653 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10655 \begin_inset space ~
10663 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10669 \begin_layout Subsection
10671 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10673 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10678 \begin_inset Index idx
10681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10682 Spacing ! Horizontal
10690 \begin_layout Standard
10691 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10693 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10694 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10698 The length units are listed in Appendix
10699 \begin_inset space ~
10703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10705 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10712 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10714 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10716 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10721 \begin_inset Index idx
10724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10725 Spaces ! Inter-word
10733 \begin_layout Standard
10734 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10735 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10736 at the ends of sentences.
10737 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10738 automatically takes care about this.
10739 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10740 followed by a period; see section
10741 \begin_inset space ~
10745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10747 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10752 To insert a normal space, select
10754 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10755 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10757 \begin_inset space ~
10765 arg "space-insert normal"
10771 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10773 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10775 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10780 \begin_inset Index idx
10783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10792 \begin_layout Standard
10794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10801 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10810 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10811 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10812 inside abbreviations:
10815 \begin_layout Quote
10817 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10821 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10824 \begin_layout Standard
10825 or between values and units.
10826 Compare for example this:
10827 \begin_inset Newline newline
10831 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10835 \begin_inset Newline newline
10838 10 kg (normal space
10841 \begin_layout Standard
10842 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10844 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10845 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10847 \begin_inset space ~
10855 arg "space-insert thin"
10861 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10865 \begin_layout Standard
10866 You can also insert the following space types:
10869 \begin_layout Description
10871 \begin_inset space ~
10875 \begin_inset space ~
10878 space A line with a
10879 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10883 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10887 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10890 negative thin space between the arrows.
10893 \begin_layout Description
10895 \begin_inset space ~
10899 \begin_inset space ~
10902 space A line with a
10903 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10907 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10911 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10914 negative medium space between the arrows.
10917 \begin_layout Description
10919 \begin_inset space ~
10923 \begin_inset space ~
10926 space A line with a
10927 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10931 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10935 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10938 negative thick space between the arrows.
10941 \begin_layout Description
10943 \begin_inset space ~
10947 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10951 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10955 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10959 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10963 \begin_inset space ~
10967 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10970 em) space between the arrows.
10973 \begin_layout Description
10975 \begin_inset space ~
10979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10983 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10987 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10991 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10995 \begin_inset space ~
10999 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11002 em) space between the arrows.
11005 \begin_layout Description
11007 \begin_inset space ~
11011 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11015 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11019 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11023 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11027 \begin_inset space ~
11031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11034 em) space between the arrows.
11037 \begin_layout Description
11039 \begin_inset space ~
11043 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11047 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11052 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11059 cm space between the arrows.
11062 \begin_layout Standard
11064 \begin_inset space ~
11068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11070 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11074 lists the different space sizes.
11077 \begin_layout Standard
11078 \begin_inset Float table
11083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11084 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11087 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11089 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11093 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11103 \begin_inset Tabular
11104 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11105 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11106 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11107 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11147 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11195 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11219 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11223 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11227 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11251 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11275 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11318 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11346 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11359 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11380 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11382 \begin_inset Index idx
11385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11394 \begin_layout Standard
11395 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11396 feature for adding extra space
11397 in a uniform fashion.
11398 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11399 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11400 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11401 equally between themselves.
11404 \begin_layout Standard
11405 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11408 \begin_layout Quote
11410 This is on the left side
11411 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11414 This is on the right
11417 \begin_layout Quote
11420 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11424 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11430 \begin_layout Quote
11433 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11437 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11441 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11447 \begin_layout Standard
11448 That was an example in the
11454 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11458 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11462 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11465 is one in a standard paragraph.
11466 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11470 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11473 \begin_layout Standard
11474 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11477 \begin_inset space ~
11482 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11485 \begin_layout Standard
11487 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11491 \begin_inset space ~
11497 \begin_layout Standard
11499 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11503 \begin_inset space ~
11509 \begin_layout Standard
11511 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11515 \begin_inset space ~
11521 \begin_layout Standard
11523 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11527 \begin_inset space ~
11533 \begin_layout Standard
11535 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11539 \begin_inset space ~
11545 \begin_layout Standard
11547 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11551 \begin_inset space ~
11557 \begin_layout Standard
11558 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11566 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11570 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11572 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11573 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11577 option in the space dialog.
11585 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11587 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11589 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11594 \begin_inset Index idx
11597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11606 \begin_layout Standard
11607 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11608 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11611 \begin_layout Standard
11612 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11615 What is correct English?:
11616 \begin_inset Newline newline
11620 \begin_inset Newline newline
11624 \begin_inset space ~
11627 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11628 \begin_inset Newline newline
11632 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11643 \begin_inset Newline newline
11647 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11658 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11664 \begin_layout Standard
11666 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11671 \begin_inset space ~
11675 \begin_inset space ~
11679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11683 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11685 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11686 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11690 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11696 \begin_inset space ~
11700 \begin_inset space ~
11704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11707 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11716 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11717 That is why it is named
11718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11726 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11727 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11731 \begin_layout Subsection
11733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11735 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11740 \begin_inset Index idx
11743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11752 \begin_layout Standard
11753 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11755 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11756 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11758 \begin_inset space ~
11764 There you find the following sizes:
11767 \begin_layout Standard
11780 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11781 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11786 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11788 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11789 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11791 \begin_inset space ~
11797 \begin_inset Index idx
11800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11801 Document ! Settings
11806 for the paragraph separation.
11807 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11818 \begin_layout Standard
11824 \begin_inset Index idx
11827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11833 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11834 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11839 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11840 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11849 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11858 s are described in section
11859 \begin_inset space ~
11863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11865 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11874 If there are several
11878 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11879 You can therefore use
11883 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11886 \begin_layout Standard
11891 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11892 \begin_inset space ~
11896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11898 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11905 \begin_layout Standard
11906 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11916 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11917 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11929 \begin_layout Subsection
11930 Paragraph Alignment
11931 \begin_inset Index idx
11934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11935 Paragraph ! Alignment
11943 \begin_layout Standard
11944 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11946 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11949 dialog (toolbar button
11952 arg "layout-paragraph"
11956 There are five possibilities:
11959 \begin_layout Itemize
11967 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11973 \begin_layout Itemize
11981 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11987 \begin_layout Itemize
11995 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12001 \begin_layout Itemize
12009 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12015 \begin_layout Itemize
12023 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12029 \begin_layout Standard
12030 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12031 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12032 the left and right margins.
12033 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12036 \begin_layout Standard
12038 This paragraph is right aligned,
12041 \begin_layout Standard
12043 this one is centered,
12046 \begin_layout Standard
12048 this one is left aligned.
12051 \begin_layout Subsection
12053 \begin_inset Index idx
12056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12057 Page breaks ! Forced
12063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12065 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12072 \begin_layout Standard
12073 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12074 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12075 force a page break where you want one.
12076 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12077 is good at page breaking.
12078 Only if you use a lot of
12082 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12083 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12086 \begin_layout Standard
12087 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12088 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12092 have to change the page breaking.
12095 \begin_layout Standard
12096 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12098 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12100 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12101 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12103 \begin_inset space ~
12109 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12111 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12112 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12114 \begin_inset space ~
12119 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12121 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12122 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12125 \begin_layout Standard
12126 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12127 at the top of a page.
12128 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12130 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12131 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12132 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12136 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12140 to learn more about
12147 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12149 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12151 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12156 \begin_inset Index idx
12159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12160 Page breaks ! Clear
12168 \begin_layout Standard
12169 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12170 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12171 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12172 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12173 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12176 \begin_layout Standard
12177 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12179 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12180 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12182 \begin_inset space ~
12188 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12190 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12191 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12193 \begin_inset space ~
12197 \begin_inset space ~
12202 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12203 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12206 \begin_layout Subsection
12208 \begin_inset Index idx
12211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12218 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12220 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12227 \begin_layout Standard
12228 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12230 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12232 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12233 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12235 \begin_inset space ~
12239 \begin_inset space ~
12247 arg "newline-insert newline"
12251 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12253 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12254 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12256 \begin_inset space ~
12260 \begin_inset space ~
12268 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12271 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12273 This is useful to avoid
12274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12281 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12284 \begin_layout Standard
12285 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12286 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12288 very good at line breaking.
12289 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12290 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12291 \begin_inset space ~
12295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12297 reference "sec:Quote"
12302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12304 reference "sec:Verse"
12309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12311 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12318 \begin_layout Subsection
12320 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12322 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12327 \begin_inset Index idx
12330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12339 \begin_layout Standard
12341 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12352 \begin_layout Standard
12356 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12357 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12359 \begin_inset space ~
12364 you can insert horizontal lines.
12365 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12366 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12367 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12370 \begin_layout Standard
12372 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12383 \begin_layout Section
12384 Characters and Symbols
12387 \begin_layout Standard
12388 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12389 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12390 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12398 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12402 for information on how this is done.
12405 \begin_layout Standard
12406 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12411 dialog via the menu
12413 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12414 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12420 \begin_layout Standard
12421 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12429 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12430 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12432 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12440 \begin_layout Section
12441 Fonts and Text Styles
12442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12444 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12451 \begin_layout Subsection
12453 \begin_inset Index idx
12456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12465 \begin_layout Standard
12466 There are two types of fonts:
12469 \begin_layout Description
12471 \begin_inset space ~
12475 \begin_inset Index idx
12478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12484 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12485 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12489 characters) in the font.
12490 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12491 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12492 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12493 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12494 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12495 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12496 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12497 \begin_inset Newline newline
12500 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12501 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12502 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12503 sizes than at small ones.
12504 \begin_inset Newline newline
12518 \begin_inset space ~
12526 \begin_layout Description
12528 \begin_inset space ~
12532 \begin_inset Index idx
12535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12541 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12542 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12543 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12544 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12545 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12546 image manipulation program.
12547 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12548 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12549 \begin_inset space ~
12552 pixels high up to 34
12553 \begin_inset space ~
12556 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12557 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12558 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12560 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12561 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12562 \begin_inset Newline newline
12565 Bitmap fonts are named
12568 \begin_inset space ~
12573 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12576 \begin_layout Standard
12577 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12578 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12579 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12580 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12581 use scalable fonts.
12584 \begin_layout Standard
12585 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12588 \begin_layout Standard
12589 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12590 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12591 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12592 font to emphasize text, you use an
12593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12601 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12603 In \SpecialChar LyX
12604 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12608 \begin_layout Subsection
12611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12613 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12620 \begin_layout Standard
12621 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12622 used its own fonts.
12623 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12624 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12627 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12628 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12629 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12630 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12631 to a word processor.
12632 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12633 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12634 files are very portable across
12635 different machines.
12636 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12637 has increased a lot
12638 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12641 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12643 \begin_inset space ~
12647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12649 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12654 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12655 code in the document
12656 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12659 \begin_layout Standard
12660 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12661 engines that are also able directly
12662 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12664 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12666 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12668 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12669 that is installed on your system.
12670 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12673 \begin_layout Standard
12674 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12682 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12683 es; so you might have to experiment.
12691 \begin_layout Subsection
12692 Document Font and Font size
12693 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12695 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12700 \begin_inset Index idx
12703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12710 \begin_inset Index idx
12713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12722 \begin_layout Standard
12723 You can set the document fonts in the
12725 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12729 \begin_inset Index idx
12732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12733 Document ! Settings
12743 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12744 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12747 \begin_inset space ~
12756 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12758 \begin_inset space ~
12761 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12764 \begin_layout Standard
12769 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12770 This requires that you use
12782 as the output format, i.
12783 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12787 \begin_inset space \space{}
12790 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12791 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12792 installed (see section
12793 \begin_inset space ~
12797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12799 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12804 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12806 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12807 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12809 \begin_inset space ~
12812 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12813 cannot determine the family.
12814 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12815 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12818 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12821 \begin_layout Standard
12822 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12823 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12828 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12834 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12835 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12843 \begin_inset space ~
12849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12862 European Computer Modern
12865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12872 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12875 \begin_layout Standard
12884 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12885 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12890 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12893 \begin_inset space ~
12898 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12904 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12905 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12908 \begin_layout Itemize
12912 \begin_inset space ~
12917 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12930 \begin_inset space ~
12935 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12936 community in order to replace
12940 as the default font.
12941 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12942 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12945 \begin_inset space ~
12958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12959 One difference is improved kerning.
12967 \begin_layout Itemize
12971 \begin_inset space ~
12975 \begin_inset space ~
12980 fonts in (the rare) case that
12983 \begin_inset space ~
12988 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
13003 Virtual means that it
13004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13015 -glyphs from other fonts.
13016 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13038 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13044 \begin_inset Index idx
13047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13049 -packages ! aeguill
13054 with the document preamble line
13055 \begin_inset Newline newline
13062 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13063 \begin_inset Newline newline
13068 will fix the guillemet problem.
13073 and that accented characters are not
13077 glyph, but built of
13081 characters, the accent and the letter.
13082 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13088 If you search for example for the French word
13089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13096 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13105 and not for the glyph
13106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13110 \begin_inset space ~
13114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13120 \begin_layout Itemize
13121 If you do not like the look of
13129 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13130 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13134 \begin_inset space ~
13140 \begin_inset space ~
13150 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13151 \begin_inset space ~
13154 serif and typewriter fonts,
13158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13159 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13166 \begin_inset space ~
13175 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13176 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13180 \begin_inset space \space{}
13188 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13192 \begin_inset space \space{}
13198 \begin_inset space ~
13206 \begin_inset space ~
13216 but you can also select your own.
13217 \begin_inset Newline newline
13220 The differences between roman,
13223 \begin_inset space ~
13232 fonts are explained in section
13233 \begin_inset space ~
13237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13239 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13244 \begin_inset Newline newline
13250 \begin_inset space ~
13255 was originally designed for newspapers.
13256 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13257 into the small newspaper columns.
13261 \begin_inset space ~
13266 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13269 \begin_layout Standard
13270 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13283 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13288 depends on the class you are using.
13289 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13292 \begin_layout Standard
13293 Note that the font size is the
13298 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13299 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13300 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13301 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13304 \begin_inset space ~
13310 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13311 \begin_inset space ~
13315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13317 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13324 \begin_layout Standard
13328 \begin_inset space ~
13333 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13335 \begin_inset space ~
13338 serif or typewriter.
13343 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13353 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13356 \begin_layout Standard
13361 LaTeX font encoding
13363 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13364 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13370 \begin_inset Index idx
13373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13375 -packages ! fontenc
13381 \begin_inset space ~
13385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13387 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13392 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13393 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13400 \begin_layout Standard
13401 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13403 Use Old Style Figures
13407 Use True Small Caps
13410 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13413 Use Old Style Figures
13415 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13417 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13418 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13422 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13425 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13429 Use True Small Caps
13431 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13432 of scaled capitals.
13433 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13434 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13437 \begin_layout Standard
13442 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13443 a font to display the script characters.
13447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13448 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13454 \begin_inset Index idx
13457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13464 So this has no effect for the document language
13478 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13482 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13490 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13495 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13496 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13498 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13500 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13503 dialog, see section
13504 \begin_inset space ~
13508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13510 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13522 \begin_layout Subsection
13526 \begin_layout Standard
13527 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13528 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13530 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13531 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13532 choose a math font in the dialog
13534 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13538 \begin_inset Index idx
13541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13542 Document ! Settings
13548 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13549 automatically selects a math font.
13550 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13551 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13560 \begin_inset space ~
13566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13571 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13572 document font is available.
13575 \begin_layout Standard
13576 Note that the math font will not be used for
13580 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13586 or by the insertion of the command
13593 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13594 \begin_inset space ~
13598 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13599 while the math characters do not.
13601 \begin_inset space ~
13604 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13607 \begin_inset space ~
13615 \begin_inset space ~
13620 in the document font settings.
13623 \begin_layout Standard
13624 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13625 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13626 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13627 font (in most cases
13628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13634 \begin_inset space ~
13640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13643 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13644 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13652 \begin_inset space ~
13658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13664 \begin_layout Subsection
13665 Using Different Character Styles
13666 \begin_inset Index idx
13669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13676 \begin_inset Index idx
13679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13688 \begin_layout Standard
13689 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13690 automatically changes the character style for certain
13691 paragraph environments.
13693 supports two character styles,
13702 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13706 \begin_layout Standard
13711 style, do one of the following:
13714 \begin_layout Itemize
13715 click on the toolbar button
13724 \begin_layout Itemize
13725 use the key binding
13734 \begin_layout Standard
13735 These commands are all toggles.
13740 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13743 \begin_layout Standard
13744 One typically uses the
13748 style for proper names.
13750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13757 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13765 \begin_layout Standard
13766 A more widely used character style is the
13771 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13778 \begin_layout Itemize
13779 clicking on the toolbar button
13788 \begin_layout Itemize
13789 using the keybindings
13798 \begin_layout Standard
13803 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13805 use a different font.
13808 \begin_layout Standard
13809 We've been using the
13813 style all over the place in this document.
13814 Here's one more example:
13817 \begin_layout Quotation
13820 Do not overuse character styles!
13823 \begin_layout Standard
13824 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13825 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13826 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13827 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13831 \begin_layout Standard
13832 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13840 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13842 \begin_inset space ~
13845 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13851 arg "dialog-show character"
13857 \begin_layout Subsection
13858 Fine-Tuning with the
13863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13865 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13870 \begin_inset Index idx
13873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13882 \begin_layout Standard
13883 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13885 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13886 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13887 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13888 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13889 from ordinary dialog.
13892 \begin_layout Standard
13893 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13894 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13895 \begin_inset Newline newline
13898 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13899 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13902 \begin_layout Standard
13903 To use custom character styles, open the
13905 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13907 \begin_inset space ~
13910 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13913 dialog or press the toolbar button
13916 arg "dialog-show character"
13920 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13921 font property that you can choose.
13922 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13925 \begin_inset space ~
13930 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13935 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13936 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13937 environments all at once.
13940 \begin_layout Standard
13941 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13944 \begin_inset space ~
13956 \begin_layout Labeling
13957 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13971 The possible options are:
13975 \begin_layout Labeling
13976 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13981 This is the Roman font family.
13982 Normally a serif font.
13983 It's also the default family.
13993 \begin_layout Labeling
13994 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13998 \begin_inset space ~
14005 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14017 \begin_layout Labeling
14018 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14025 This is the Typewriter font family.
14031 arg "font-typewriter"
14040 \begin_layout Labeling
14041 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14046 This corresponds to the print weight.
14051 \begin_layout Labeling
14052 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14057 This is the Medium font series.
14058 It's also the default series.
14061 \begin_layout Labeling
14062 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14069 This is the Bold font series.
14082 \begin_layout Labeling
14083 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14088 As the name implies.
14093 \begin_layout Labeling
14094 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14099 This is the Upright font shape.
14100 It's also the default shape.
14103 \begin_layout Labeling
14104 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14118 s the Italic font shape
14124 \begin_layout Labeling
14125 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14132 This is the Slanted font shape
14134 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14135 , this is different from italic).
14138 \begin_layout Labeling
14139 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14143 \begin_inset space ~
14150 This is the Small caps font shape
14157 \begin_layout Labeling
14158 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14163 Alters the text color.
14164 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14168 \begin_inset space ~
14173 , which means that the document default color set in
14175 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14176 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14182 \begin_inset space ~
14187 is used, you can choose between
14264 \begin_inset Index idx
14267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14276 \begin_layout Labeling
14277 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14282 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14283 the language of the document.
14284 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14285 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14287 \begin_inset Newline newline
14290 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14292 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14293 When using the spell checking (see section
14294 \begin_inset space ~
14298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14300 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14304 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14307 \begin_layout Labeling
14308 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14313 Alters the size of the font.
14314 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14315 proportional to the document font size.
14316 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14317 the details, but a general description of what
14323 \begin_layout Labeling
14324 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14345 arg "font-size tiny"
14351 \begin_layout Labeling
14352 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14373 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14379 \begin_layout Labeling
14380 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14401 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14407 \begin_layout Labeling
14408 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14429 arg "font-size small"
14435 \begin_layout Labeling
14436 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14450 It's also the default size.
14454 arg "font-size normal"
14460 \begin_layout Labeling
14461 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14482 arg "font-size large"
14488 \begin_layout Labeling
14489 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14510 arg "font-size larger"
14516 \begin_layout Labeling
14517 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14538 arg "font-size largest"
14544 \begin_layout Labeling
14545 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14566 arg "font-size huge"
14572 \begin_layout Labeling
14573 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14594 arg "font-size giant"
14600 \begin_layout Labeling
14601 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14606 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14626 arg "font-size increase"
14632 \begin_layout Labeling
14633 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14638 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14658 arg "font-size decrease"
14665 \begin_layout Standard
14670 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14671 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14673 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14674 — use those instead.
14675 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14678 \begin_layout Labeling
14679 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14684 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14689 \begin_layout Labeling
14690 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14697 This is text with emphasize on
14700 This might seem like the same as
14704 , but it is actually a bit different.
14710 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14712 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14715 \begin_layout Labeling
14716 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14723 This is text with Underbar on.
14729 arg "font-underline"
14735 \begin_inset Newline newline
14740 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14741 when you could not change fonts.
14742 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14743 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14744 because some people
14748 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14751 \begin_layout Labeling
14752 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14756 \begin_inset space ~
14763 This is text with Double underbar on.
14769 arg "font-underunderline"
14773 \begin_inset Newline newline
14776 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14777 about double underbar.
14780 \begin_layout Labeling
14781 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14785 \begin_inset space ~
14792 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14798 arg "font-underwave"
14802 \begin_inset Newline newline
14805 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14806 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14809 \begin_layout Labeling
14810 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14817 This is text with Strikeout on.
14823 arg "font-strikeout"
14827 \begin_inset Newline newline
14830 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14831 changed in the meantime.
14834 \begin_layout Labeling
14835 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14842 This is text with Noun on.
14849 , this is a logical attribute.
14850 Normally it's equivalent to
14853 \begin_inset space ~
14862 \begin_layout Standard
14863 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14864 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14866 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14868 \begin_inset space ~
14871 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14877 arg "dialog-show character"
14880 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14881 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14884 arg "textstyle-apply"
14888 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14892 \begin_layout Standard
14893 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14900 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14901 (suppose you just set the shape to
14902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14920 \begin_inset space ~
14932 \begin_layout Standard
14933 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14941 \begin_inset space ~
14953 \begin_layout Itemize
14959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14966 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14984 \begin_inset Newline newline
14988 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15002 \begin_inset Note Note
15005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15006 For more on phantoms see section
15007 \begin_inset space ~
15011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15013 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15023 \begin_inset Newline newline
15029 \begin_layout Itemize
15034 fonts use characters with serifs.
15035 These are the small
15036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15043 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15044 The following example shows the difference:
15045 \begin_inset Newline newline
15049 \begin_inset Newline newline
15054 text without serifs
15057 \begin_inset Newline newline
15060 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15061 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15068 \begin_layout Itemize
15073 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15074 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15075 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15078 \begin_layout Standard
15079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15086 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15087 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15090 \begin_inset space ~
15095 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15096 the property to be removed.
15097 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15098 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15099 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15117 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15118 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15126 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15130 \begin_inset space ~
15135 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15146 If you, for example, set
15147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15165 \begin_inset space ~
15170 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15179 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15182 \begin_layout Standard
15183 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15184 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15187 \begin_layout Section
15188 Printing and Previewing
15191 \begin_layout Subsection
15195 \begin_layout Standard
15196 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15197 using \SpecialChar LyX
15198 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15199 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15200 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15201 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15203 Additional Features
15208 \begin_layout Standard
15210 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15213 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15214 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15215 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15218 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15219 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15220 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15221 to turn your writing into printable output.
15222 This happens in two stages:
15225 \begin_layout Enumerate
15226 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15227 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15229 a file with the extension,
15230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15244 \begin_layout Enumerate
15245 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15246 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15247 to use the commands in the
15251 file to produce printable output.
15254 \begin_layout Subsection
15255 Output file formats
15256 \begin_inset Index idx
15259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15266 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15268 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15275 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15276 Simple text (ASCII)
15277 \begin_inset Index idx
15280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15281 File formats ! ASCII
15289 \begin_layout Standard
15290 This file type has the extension
15291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15303 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15307 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15314 \begin_layout Standard
15315 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15317 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15318 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15320 \begin_inset space ~
15326 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15327 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15328 bibliography (section
15329 \begin_inset space ~
15333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15335 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15340 If your document includes such material, use
15342 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15343 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15345 \begin_inset space ~
15349 \begin_inset space ~
15353 \begin_inset space ~
15361 \begin_inset space ~
15365 \begin_inset space ~
15371 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15372 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15375 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15378 \begin_inset Index idx
15381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15382 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15391 \begin_layout Standard
15392 This file type has the extension
15393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15404 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15407 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15408 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15409 -Errors or to process it manually
15410 with console commands.
15411 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15412 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15413 's temporary directory whenever you
15414 view or export your document.
15417 \begin_layout Standard
15418 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15419 -file using the menu
15421 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15422 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15426 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15427 export variants are explained in section
15428 \begin_inset space ~
15432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15434 reference "subsec:Export"
15441 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15443 \begin_inset Index idx
15446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15455 \begin_layout Standard
15456 This file type has the extension
15457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15477 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15478 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15479 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15483 \begin_layout Standard
15484 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15485 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15486 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15487 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15488 when you view the DVI.
15489 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15492 \begin_layout Standard
15493 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15495 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15496 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15501 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15502 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15504 \begin_inset space ~
15510 The latter option uses the program
15512 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15518 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15521 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15522 font access (see section
15523 \begin_inset space ~
15527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15529 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15534 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15535 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15540 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15542 \begin_inset Index idx
15545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15546 File formats ! PostScript
15554 \begin_layout Standard
15555 This file type has the extension
15556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15568 PostScript was developed by the company
15572 as a printer language.
15573 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15575 PostScript can be seen as a
15576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15579 programming language
15580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15583 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15588 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15595 \begin_inset Index idx
15598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15600 -packages ! pstricks
15610 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15613 \begin_layout Standard
15614 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15618 Encapsulated PostScript
15619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15622 (EPS, file extension
15623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15635 As \SpecialChar LyX
15636 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15637 convert them in the background to EPS.
15638 If, for example, you have 50
15639 \begin_inset space ~
15642 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15644 \begin_inset space ~
15647 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15648 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15650 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15651 EPS to avoid this problem.
15654 \begin_layout Standard
15655 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15657 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15658 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15664 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15666 \begin_inset Index idx
15669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15676 \begin_inset Index idx
15679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15688 \begin_layout Standard
15689 This file type has the extension
15690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15706 Portable Document Format
15707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15714 was derived from PostScript.
15715 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15724 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15725 looks exactly the same.
15728 \begin_layout Standard
15729 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15733 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15737 (JPG, file extension
15738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15765 Portable Network Graphics
15766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15769 (PNG, file extension
15770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15782 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15783 converts them in the
15784 background to one of these formats.
15785 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15786 will slow down your workflow.
15787 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15790 \begin_layout Standard
15791 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15793 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15799 \begin_layout Description
15801 \begin_inset space ~
15804 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15808 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15811 \begin_layout Description
15813 \begin_inset space ~
15820 ) This uses the program
15822 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15825 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15828 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15831 is a new engine, derived from
15835 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15836 access (see section
15837 \begin_inset space ~
15841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15843 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15848 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15849 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15854 \begin_layout Description
15856 \begin_inset space ~
15863 ) This uses the program
15868 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15874 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15875 font access (see section
15876 \begin_inset space ~
15880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15882 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15887 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15888 vertically written Japanese.
15891 \begin_layout Description
15893 \begin_inset space ~
15896 (cropped) This is the same as
15899 \begin_inset space ~
15904 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15905 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15906 to generate good-looking
15907 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15910 \begin_layout Description
15912 \begin_inset space ~
15915 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15919 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15923 \begin_layout Description
15925 \begin_inset space ~
15928 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15932 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15933 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15937 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15938 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15941 \begin_layout Standard
15945 \begin_inset space ~
15954 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15955 works without problems.
15956 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15957 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15961 \begin_inset space ~
15969 \begin_inset space ~
15974 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15982 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15984 \begin_inset Index idx
15987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15988 FileFormats ! XHTML
15994 \begin_inset Index idx
15997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16006 \begin_layout Standard
16007 This file type has the extension
16008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16020 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16021 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16022 When \SpecialChar LyX
16023 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16024 suitable for the purpose.
16025 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16027 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16028 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16031 between different formats, which are described in section
16033 Math Output in XHTML
16038 \begin_inset space ~
16046 \begin_layout Standard
16047 XHTML output remains
16048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16055 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16056 features are supported yet.
16060 and the World Wide Web
16064 Additional Features
16066 manual, for more information.
16069 \begin_layout Standard
16070 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16072 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16073 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16079 \begin_layout Subsection
16081 \begin_inset Index idx
16084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16093 \begin_layout Standard
16094 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16095 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16104 or use the toolbar button
16111 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16112 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16113 \begin_inset space ~
16117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16119 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16123 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16125 \begin_inset space ~
16129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16131 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16136 Further output formats can be selected via
16138 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16139 View (Other Formats)
16141 or the toolbar button
16150 \begin_layout Standard
16151 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16152 viewer window using the menu
16154 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16159 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16160 Update (Other Formats)
16165 \begin_layout Standard
16166 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16169 To have a real output, export your document.
16172 \begin_layout Section
16173 A few Words about Typography
16174 \begin_inset Index idx
16177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16186 \begin_layout Subsection
16187 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16188 \begin_inset Index idx
16191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16198 \begin_inset Index idx
16201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16210 \begin_layout Standard
16211 In \SpecialChar LyX
16213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16224 character comes in four lengths: the
16236 , and the minus sign:
16237 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16243 \begin_layout Standard
16244 \begin_inset Tabular
16245 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16246 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16247 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16248 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16249 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16250 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16279 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16319 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16344 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16346 \begin_inset space ~
16349 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16356 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16381 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16383 \begin_inset space ~
16386 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16407 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16441 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16447 \begin_layout Standard
16448 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16460 character multiple times in a row.
16461 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16462 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16469 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16481 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16485 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16495 \begin_layout Standard
16496 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16497 math mode and has a length of its own.
16498 Here are some examples:
16501 \begin_layout Enumerate
16502 line- and page-breaks
16503 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16513 \begin_layout Enumerate
16515 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16525 \begin_layout Enumerate
16526 Oh — there's a dash.
16527 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16537 \begin_layout Enumerate
16538 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16542 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16552 \begin_layout Subsection
16554 \begin_inset Index idx
16557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16564 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16566 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16573 \begin_layout Standard
16574 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16575 but automatically in the output.
16576 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16582 \begin_inset Index idx
16585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16592 following the rules of the document language.
16595 \begin_layout Standard
16597 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16601 font and with unusual constructs, like
16602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16610 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16611 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16612 This is done with the menu
16614 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16615 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16617 \begin_inset space ~
16623 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16625 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16629 \begin_layout Standard
16630 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16631 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16642 would then see the hyphen
16643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16650 as a hyphenation possibility.
16651 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16652 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16653 as described in section
16655 Prevent Hyphenation
16660 \begin_inset space ~
16668 \begin_layout Subsection
16670 \begin_inset Index idx
16673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16682 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16683 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16686 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16693 \begin_layout Standard
16694 When \SpecialChar LyX
16695 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16696 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16698 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16704 appropriate amount of space.
16705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16708 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16710 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16711 gets after another word.
16714 \begin_layout Standard
16715 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16716 not work in all cases.
16718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16729 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16730 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16733 \begin_layout Standard
16734 Here are some examples of
16738 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16741 \begin_layout Itemize
16746 \begin_layout Itemize
16751 \begin_layout Standard
16752 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16755 \begin_layout Itemize
16757 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16761 this is too much space!
16764 \begin_layout Itemize
16769 \begin_layout Standard
16770 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16773 \begin_layout Standard
16774 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16777 \begin_layout Enumerate
16781 \begin_inset space ~
16786 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16787 \begin_inset space ~
16791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16793 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16798 \begin_inset Index idx
16801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16802 Spaces ! inter-word
16810 \begin_layout Enumerate
16814 \begin_inset space ~
16819 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16820 \begin_inset space ~
16824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16826 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16831 \begin_inset Index idx
16834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16843 \begin_layout Enumerate
16847 \begin_inset space ~
16851 \begin_inset space ~
16855 \begin_inset space ~
16862 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16864 \begin_inset space ~
16869 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16870 This function is also bound to
16873 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16879 \begin_layout Standard
16880 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16883 \begin_layout Itemize
16885 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16889 \begin_inset space \space{}
16892 this is too much space!
16895 \begin_layout Itemize
16896 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16900 \begin_layout Standard
16901 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16902 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16904 will take care of this.
16907 \begin_layout Standard
16908 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16912 \begin_inset space ~
16918 feature described in the section
16920 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16925 Additional Features
16930 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16932 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667523
16934 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669265
16938 \begin_inset Index idx
16941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16943 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669122
16945 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669123
16954 \begin_inset Index idx
16957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16959 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669129
16961 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669204
16968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16994 \begin_layout Standard
16997 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666231
16999 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666233
17003 Specifically, it will
17004 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667043
17006 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667044
17010 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666244
17012 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666245
17015 at the beginning of quoted text, and use a closing
17016 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666248
17018 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666249
17023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17031 The keyboard character,
17035 , generates this automatically.
17038 \begin_layout Standard
17039 You can specify what character the
17044 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669340
17048 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667059
17057 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17061 \begin_inset Index idx
17064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17065 Document ! Settings
17071 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667133
17073 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669342
17079 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667108
17082 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17083 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language)
17087 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666221
17089 \change_inserted -712698321 1482756786
17095 \begin_layout Labeling
17096 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17099 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17110 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666647
17112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17120 \begin_inset space ~
17124 \begin_inset space ~
17128 \begin_inset Quotes els
17132 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17140 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17142 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665592
17146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17150 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665595
17152 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17156 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665605
17160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17164 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665637
17166 \begin_inset Quotes els
17170 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17173 quotation marks (as common, e.
17174 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17182 \begin_layout Labeling
17183 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17185 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666660
17188 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17192 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17196 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666671
17198 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17202 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17206 \begin_inset space ~
17210 \begin_inset space ~
17214 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17218 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17226 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666660
17227 Use quotes like ”this”
17228 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665692
17230 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17234 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17238 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17242 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17245 quotation marks (as common, e.
17246 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17254 \begin_layout Labeling
17255 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17257 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666683
17260 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17264 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17268 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666696
17270 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17274 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17278 \begin_inset space ~
17282 \begin_inset space ~
17286 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17290 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17298 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666683
17300 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17304 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17308 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665749
17310 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17314 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17318 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17322 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17325 quotation marks (as common, e.
17326 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17334 \begin_layout Labeling
17335 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17337 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666707
17340 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17344 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17348 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666716
17350 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17354 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17358 \begin_inset space ~
17362 \begin_inset space ~
17366 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17370 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17378 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666707
17380 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17384 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17388 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665786
17390 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17394 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17398 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17402 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17405 quotation marks (as common, e.
17406 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17414 \begin_layout Labeling
17415 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17417 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666725
17420 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17424 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17428 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666730
17430 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17434 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17438 \begin_inset space ~
17442 \begin_inset space ~
17446 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17450 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17458 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666725
17460 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17464 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17468 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665816
17470 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17474 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17478 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17482 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17485 quotation marks (as common, e.
17486 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17489 g., in Switzerland)
17494 \begin_layout Labeling
17495 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17497 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666741
17500 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17504 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17508 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666747
17510 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17514 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17518 \begin_inset space ~
17522 \begin_inset space ~
17526 \begin_inset Quotes als
17530 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17538 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666741
17540 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17544 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17548 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665851
17550 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17554 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17558 \begin_inset Quotes als
17562 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17565 quotation marks (as common, e.
17566 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17572 \begin_layout Labeling
17573 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17575 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666768
17578 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17582 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17586 \begin_inset space ~
17590 \begin_inset space ~
17594 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17598 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17604 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17608 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17612 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17616 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17619 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
17622 \begin_layout Labeling
17623 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17625 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666784
17628 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17632 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17636 \begin_inset space ~
17640 \begin_inset space ~
17644 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17648 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17654 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17658 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17662 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17666 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17669 quotation marks (as common, e.
17670 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17673 g., in Great Britain)
17676 \begin_layout Labeling
17677 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17679 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666803
17682 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17686 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17690 \begin_inset space ~
17694 \begin_inset space ~
17698 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17702 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17708 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17712 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17716 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17720 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17723 quotation marks (as common, e.
17724 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17730 \begin_layout Labeling
17731 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17733 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668207
17736 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17740 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17744 \begin_inset space ~
17748 \begin_inset space ~
17752 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17756 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17762 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17766 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17770 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17774 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17777 quotation marks (another style common in France)
17781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17783 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668407
17784 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
17785 since these look identical to the inner marks.
17786 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
17787 the inner marks differ).
17797 \begin_layout Labeling
17798 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17800 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666837
17803 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17807 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17811 \begin_inset space ~
17815 \begin_inset space ~
17819 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17823 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17829 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17833 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17837 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17841 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17844 quotation marks (as common, e.
17845 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17851 \begin_layout Labeling
17852 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17854 \change_inserted -712698321 1482756796
17857 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17861 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17865 \begin_inset space ~
17869 \begin_inset space ~
17873 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17877 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17883 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17887 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17891 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17895 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17898 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
17901 \begin_layout Labeling
17902 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17904 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757086
17905 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17913 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17919 \begin_inset space ~
17923 \begin_inset space ~
17929 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17937 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17941 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17945 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17949 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17953 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17956 quotation marks (as common, e.
17957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17966 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757158
17967 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
17968 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
17978 \begin_layout Labeling
17979 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17981 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757171
17982 \begin_inset Quotes kld
17990 \begin_inset Quotes krd
17996 \begin_inset space ~
18000 \begin_inset space ~
18006 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18014 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18018 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18022 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18026 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18030 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18033 quotation marks (as common, e.
18034 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18037 g., in North Korea and China)
18041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18043 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757171
18044 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18045 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18055 \begin_layout Standard
18057 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667281
18059 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667281
18063 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666272
18065 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667398
18070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18072 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668512
18073 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
18074 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
18075 case (and specifically the British style shows that
18076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18083 does not necessarily mean
18084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18092 This is why we call them
18093 \begin_inset Quotes els
18097 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18118 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668702
18119 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
18121 \begin_inset Quotes els
18125 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18129 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667343
18131 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667350
18132 can be obtained by means of
18137 arg "quote-insert single"
18141 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668731
18144 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18150 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667602
18154 \begin_layout Standard
18156 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668992
18157 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
18158 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
18159 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
18160 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
18161 If you check the setting
18163 Use dynamic quotation marks
18167 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18168 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18171 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
18172 they appear in a special color).
18173 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
18174 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
18176 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18179 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
18182 \begin_layout Standard
18184 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667904
18185 Individual quotation marks (i.
18186 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18189 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
18190 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
18196 \begin_layout Subsection
18198 \begin_inset Index idx
18201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18202 Typography ! Ligatures
18208 \begin_inset Index idx
18211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18240 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18242 name "subsec:Ligatures"
18249 \begin_layout Standard
18250 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
18251 print them as single characters.
18252 These groups are known as
18257 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
18258 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
18260 Here are the standard ligatures:
18263 \begin_layout Itemize
18267 \begin_layout Itemize
18271 \begin_layout Itemize
18275 \begin_layout Itemize
18279 \begin_layout Itemize
18283 \begin_layout Standard
18284 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18287 \begin_layout Standard
18288 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18289 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18297 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18313 To break a ligature, use
18315 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18316 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18318 \begin_inset space ~
18325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18336 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18353 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18361 \begin_layout Subsection
18363 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18365 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669270
18367 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669270
18371 \begin_inset Index idx
18374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18382 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18384 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
18391 \begin_layout Standard
18394 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18395 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18399 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18402 \begin_layout Description
18404 The name of the game.
18407 \begin_layout Description
18409 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18413 \begin_layout Description
18415 The \SpecialChar TeX
18416 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18420 \begin_layout Description
18421 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18422 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18426 \begin_layout Standard
18427 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18433 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18441 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18442 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18443 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18444 converges to the number
18445 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18448 : The actual version is
18449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18457 , the previous one was
18458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18469 \begin_layout Subsection
18471 \begin_inset Index idx
18474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18483 \begin_layout Standard
18484 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18485 space between two words.
18486 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18496 for units use the menu
18498 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18499 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18501 \begin_inset space ~
18509 arg "space-insert thin"
18515 \begin_layout Standard
18516 Here is an example to show the differences:
18519 \begin_layout Standard
18520 \begin_inset Tabular
18521 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18522 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18523 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18524 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18531 \begin_inset space ~
18535 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18547 space between number and unit
18554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18559 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18563 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18575 half space between number and unit
18588 \begin_layout Subsection
18590 \begin_inset Index idx
18593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18594 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18602 \begin_layout Standard
18603 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18605 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18606 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18607 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18608 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18609 These bits of text became known as
18620 \begin_layout Standard
18621 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18622 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18623 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18624 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18625 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18626 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18627 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18628 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18629 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18630 \begin_inset Newline newline
18638 \begin_inset Newline newline
18646 \begin_inset Newline newline
18649 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18650 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18651 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18653 \begin_inset space ~
18657 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18659 key "latexcompanion"
18664 \begin_inset space ~
18668 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18674 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18675 's page break mechanism.
18678 \begin_layout Chapter
18679 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18680 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18682 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18689 \begin_layout Standard
18690 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18693 \begin_inset space ~
18699 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18702 \begin_layout Section
18704 \begin_inset Index idx
18707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18714 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18723 \begin_layout Standard
18725 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18728 \begin_layout Description
18731 \begin_inset space ~
18734 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18735 \begin_inset Newline newline
18739 \begin_inset Note Note
18742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18743 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18751 \begin_layout Description
18752 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18753 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18754 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18757 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18758 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18760 \begin_inset space ~
18766 \begin_inset Newline newline
18770 \begin_inset Note Comment
18773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18774 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18783 \begin_layout Description
18785 \begin_inset space ~
18788 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18789 set in the document settings under
18791 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18793 \begin_inset space ~
18799 \begin_inset Newline newline
18803 \begin_inset Newline newline
18807 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18816 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18817 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18822 of a comment that appears in the output.
18828 \begin_inset Newline newline
18832 \begin_inset Newline newline
18835 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18838 \begin_layout Standard
18839 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18847 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18851 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18854 \begin_layout Section
18856 \begin_inset Index idx
18859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18866 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18868 name "sec:Footnotes"
18875 \begin_layout Standard
18877 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18880 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18883 or the toolbar button
18886 arg "footnote-insert"
18898 \begin_inset Graphics
18899 filename clipart/footnote.png
18908 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18909 's representation of your footnote.
18919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18938 label, the box will
18942 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
18943 Clicking on the box label again will close
18956 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
18957 and click on the footnote
18972 \begin_layout Standard
18973 Here is an example footnote:
18981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18982 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
18990 \begin_layout Standard
18991 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
18992 position where the footnote box is placed.
18993 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
18994 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
18995 according to the document class.
18997 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
18998 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19004 ey are described in the
19007 \begin_inset space ~
19015 \begin_layout Section
19017 \begin_inset Index idx
19020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19027 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19029 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
19036 \begin_layout Standard
19037 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
19039 When you insert a margin note via the menu
19041 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19043 \begin_inset space ~
19048 or the toolbar button
19051 arg "marginalnote-insert"
19070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19077 appearing within your text.
19078 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19079 's representation of your margin
19088 \begin_layout Standard
19089 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
19093 \begin_inset Marginal
19096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19098 This is a marginal note.
19106 \begin_layout Standard
19107 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
19108 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
19109 pages, right on odd pages.
19112 \begin_layout Standard
19113 For further information about marginal notes see the section
19116 \begin_inset space ~
19124 \begin_inset space ~
19132 \begin_layout Section
19133 Graphics and Images
19134 \begin_inset Index idx
19137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19144 \begin_inset Index idx
19147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19154 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19156 name "sec:Graphics"
19163 \begin_layout Standard
19164 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
19165 you want and click on the toolbar icon
19168 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
19173 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19177 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
19180 \begin_layout Standard
19181 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
19186 tab allows you to choose your image file.
19187 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
19189 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
19190 \begin_inset space ~
19194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19196 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
19203 \begin_layout Standard
19208 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
19209 of the image in the output.
19210 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
19214 \begin_inset space ~
19218 \begin_inset space ~
19227 \begin_inset space ~
19231 \begin_inset space ~
19235 \begin_inset space ~
19240 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
19241 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
19249 \begin_layout Standard
19253 \begin_inset space ~
19257 \begin_inset space ~
19262 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
19263 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
19265 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
19270 \begin_inset space ~
19275 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19276 with the image size is printed.
19279 \begin_layout Standard
19280 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19281 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19283 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19286 \begin_layout Standard
19288 \begin_inset Graphics
19289 filename clipart/mobius.eps
19297 \begin_layout Standard
19298 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19299 the image into a float, see section
19300 \begin_inset space ~
19304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19306 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19313 \begin_layout Subsection
19315 \begin_inset Index idx
19318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19325 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19327 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19334 \begin_layout Standard
19335 You can insert images in any known file format.
19336 But as we explained in section
19337 \begin_inset space ~
19341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19343 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19347 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19349 therefore uses the program
19353 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19354 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19355 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19356 \begin_inset space ~
19360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19362 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19369 \begin_layout Standard
19370 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19373 \begin_layout Description
19375 \begin_inset space ~
19378 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19379 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19380 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19384 Graphics Interchange Format
19385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19388 (GIF, file extension
19389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19401 \begin_inset Index idx
19404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19436 Portable Network Graphics
19437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19440 (PNG, file extension
19441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19453 \begin_inset Index idx
19456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19488 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19492 (JPG, file extension
19493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19517 \begin_inset Index idx
19520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19551 \begin_layout Description
19553 \begin_inset space ~
19556 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19558 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19559 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19560 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19561 \begin_inset Newline newline
19564 Scalable image formats can be
19565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19568 Scalable Vector Graphics
19569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19572 (SVG, file extension
19573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19585 \begin_inset Index idx
19588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19620 Encapsulated PostScript
19621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19624 (EPS, file extension
19625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19637 \begin_inset Index idx
19640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19672 Portable Document Format
19673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19676 (PDF, file extension
19677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19689 \begin_inset Index idx
19692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19707 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19708 result will not be scalable.
19709 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19715 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19723 \begin_layout Standard
19724 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19731 \begin_layout Subsection
19732 Grouping of Image Settings
19733 \begin_inset Index idx
19736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19737 Images ! Settings grouping
19745 \begin_layout Standard
19746 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19748 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19749 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19751 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19752 need to manually change each of them.
19756 \begin_layout Standard
19757 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19760 \begin_inset space ~
19764 \begin_inset space ~
19776 \begin_inset space ~
19780 \begin_inset space ~
19786 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19787 and checking the name of the desired group.
19790 \begin_layout Section
19792 \begin_inset Index idx
19795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19802 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19811 \begin_layout Standard
19812 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19815 arg "tabular-insert"
19820 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19824 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19825 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19826 from the rest of the table.
19827 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19828 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19830 Here is an example table:
19833 \begin_layout Standard
19835 \begin_inset Tabular
19836 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19837 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19838 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19839 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19840 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19841 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20041 \begin_layout Subsection
20045 \begin_layout Standard
20046 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
20049 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
20053 This brings up the table dialog.
20054 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
20055 cursor is placed currently.
20056 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
20057 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
20058 done on all of your selection.
20061 \begin_layout Standard
20062 In addition to the table dialog, the
20065 \begin_inset space ~
20070 helps you in setting table properties.
20071 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
20074 \begin_layout Standard
20078 \begin_inset space ~
20083 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
20084 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
20085 current cell respectively.
20086 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
20088 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
20089 of text, see section
20090 \begin_inset space ~
20094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20096 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
20103 \begin_layout Standard
20104 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
20105 using the check box
20114 This will merge the cells to
20118 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
20119 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
20120 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
20121 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
20122 in the last row without the upper border:
20125 \begin_layout Standard
20127 \begin_inset Tabular
20128 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
20129 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
20130 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20131 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
20132 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20133 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20144 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20153 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20229 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20264 \begin_layout Standard
20265 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20266 -arguments for the table.
20267 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
20268 explained in the chapter
20275 \begin_inset space ~
20281 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20282 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20283 but are visible in the output.
20286 \begin_layout Standard
20287 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20295 Most DVI-viewers are
20299 able to display rotations.
20307 \begin_layout Standard
20312 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20317 adds lines for all cell borders.
20320 \begin_layout Subsection
20322 \begin_inset Index idx
20325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20326 Tables ! Multi-page
20332 \begin_inset Index idx
20335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20344 \begin_layout Standard
20345 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20348 \begin_inset space ~
20352 \begin_inset space ~
20360 \begin_inset space ~
20365 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20366 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20369 \begin_layout Description
20374 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20375 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20376 Except for the first page, if
20379 \begin_inset space ~
20387 \begin_layout Description
20391 \begin_inset space ~
20396 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20397 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20400 \begin_layout Description
20405 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20406 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20407 except for the last page, if
20410 \begin_inset space ~
20418 \begin_layout Description
20422 \begin_inset space ~
20427 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20428 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20431 \begin_layout Description
20432 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20433 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20435 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20439 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20442 \begin_inset space ~
20450 \begin_layout Standard
20451 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20452 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20453 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20459 In this context, first means first in this order:
20462 \begin_inset space ~
20474 \begin_inset space ~
20479 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20482 \begin_layout Standard
20484 \begin_inset Tabular
20485 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20486 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20487 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20488 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20489 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20490 <row endfirsthead="true">
20491 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20497 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20502 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20511 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20521 <row endfirsthead="true">
20522 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20533 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20542 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20554 <row endhead="true">
20555 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20566 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20575 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20585 <row endhead="true">
20586 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20597 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20606 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20618 <row endfoot="true">
20619 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20630 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20639 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20670 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21611 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21620 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21629 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21640 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21671 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21702 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21733 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21764 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21795 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21826 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21857 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21888 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21919 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21950 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21981 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22012 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22043 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22074 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22105 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22136 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22167 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22198 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22229 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22260 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22291 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22322 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22353 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22384 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22415 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22446 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22477 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22508 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22539 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22570 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22600 <row endlastfoot="true">
22601 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22612 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22621 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22638 \begin_layout Subsection
22640 \begin_inset Index idx
22643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22650 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22652 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22659 \begin_layout Standard
22660 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22661 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22662 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22663 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22667 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22670 \begin_layout Standard
22671 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22672 for the column in the table dialog.
22673 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22674 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22678 \begin_layout Standard
22680 \begin_inset Tabular
22681 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22682 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22683 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22684 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22685 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22705 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22774 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22830 This is longer now.
22835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22886 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22887 This is longer now.
22892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22918 \begin_layout Standard
22919 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
22920 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
22924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22925 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
22926 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
22932 Selection with the mouse or with
22936 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
22937 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
22938 the selection from outside the table.
22941 \begin_layout Section
22943 \begin_inset Index idx
22946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22953 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22962 \begin_layout Subsection
22966 \begin_layout Standard
22967 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
22968 have a fixed location.
22970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22977 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
22985 \begin_inset space ~
22990 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
22991 too many notes on the current page.
22994 \begin_layout Standard
22995 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
22996 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
22997 and pages without text.
22998 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
22999 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
23000 Floats are therefore numbered.
23001 Referencing is described in section
23002 \begin_inset space ~
23006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23008 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23015 \begin_layout Standard
23016 To insert a float, use the menu
23018 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23022 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
23023 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
23025 After the label you can insert the caption text.
23026 \begin_inset Index idx
23029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23035 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
23036 paragraph within the float.
23037 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
23038 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
23039 left-clicking on the box label.
23040 A closed float box looks like this:
23041 \begin_inset Graphics
23042 filename clipart/float.png
23047 – a gray button with a red label.
23050 \begin_layout Standard
23051 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
23053 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
23056 \begin_layout Subsection
23058 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23060 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23065 \begin_inset Index idx
23068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23069 Floats ! Figure floats
23077 \begin_layout Standard
23079 \begin_inset space ~
23083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23085 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
23089 was created using the menu
23091 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23092 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23098 arg "float-insert figure"
23102 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
23105 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23111 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23115 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
23116 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
23118 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23120 \begin_inset space ~
23128 arg "layout-paragraph"
23134 \begin_layout Standard
23135 \begin_inset Float figure
23140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23142 \begin_inset Graphics
23143 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23153 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23156 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23158 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
23162 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
23175 \begin_layout Standard
23176 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
23177 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
23179 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23188 ) and refer to it using the menu
23190 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23196 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
23200 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
23201 vague references like
23202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23209 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
23210 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
23212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23220 For more about cross-references, see section
23221 \begin_inset space ~
23225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23227 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23234 \begin_layout Standard
23235 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
23236 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
23237 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
23238 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
23239 as described in section
23240 \begin_inset space ~
23244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23246 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
23252 \begin_inset space ~
23256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23258 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23262 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
23263 You can also set the images one below the other.
23265 \begin_inset space ~
23269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23271 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23278 reference "fig:Platypus"
23282 are the subfigures.
23285 \begin_layout Standard
23286 \begin_inset Float figure
23291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23292 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23296 \begin_inset Float figure
23301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23302 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23305 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23307 name "fig:Undefinable"
23319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23320 \begin_inset Graphics
23321 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
23332 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23336 \begin_inset Float figure
23341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23342 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23347 name "fig:Platypus"
23359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23360 \begin_inset Graphics
23361 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23373 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23380 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23385 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23389 Two distorted images.
23402 \begin_layout Subsection
23404 \begin_inset Index idx
23407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23408 Floats ! Table floats
23416 \begin_layout Standard
23417 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23419 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23420 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23423 or the toolbar button
23426 arg "float-insert table"
23430 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23431 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23432 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23434 \begin_inset space ~
23438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23440 reference "tab:Table-float"
23447 \begin_layout Standard
23448 \begin_inset Float table
23453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23454 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23459 name "tab:Table-float"
23471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23473 \begin_inset Tabular
23474 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23475 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23476 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23477 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23478 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23605 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23626 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23629 \end{array}\right]$
23637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23650 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23671 \begin_layout Subsection
23673 \begin_inset Index idx
23676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23685 \begin_layout Standard
23687 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23688 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23689 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23691 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23699 \begin_inset space ~
23707 \begin_layout Section
23709 \begin_inset Index idx
23712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23721 \begin_layout Standard
23723 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23725 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23726 \begin_inset space \space{}
23733 \begin_layout Standard
23734 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23735 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23737 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23741 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23742 and its alignment within the page.
23745 \begin_layout Standard
23747 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23757 height_special "totalheight"
23762 backgroundcolor "none"
23765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23768 This is a minipage.
23769 The text is set in an italic style.
23772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23775 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23776 another formatting.
23784 \begin_layout Standard
23785 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23788 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23792 as described in section
23793 \begin_inset space ~
23797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23799 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23804 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23810 \begin_layout Standard
23811 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23821 height_special "totalheight"
23826 backgroundcolor "none"
23829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23830 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23831 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23837 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23841 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23851 height_special "totalheight"
23856 backgroundcolor "none"
23859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23860 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23861 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23869 \begin_layout Standard
23870 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23876 \begin_layout Standard
23877 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23879 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
23886 \begin_inset space ~
23894 \begin_layout Chapter
23895 Mathematical Formulas
23896 \begin_inset Index idx
23899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23906 \begin_inset Index idx
23909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23938 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23940 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
23947 \begin_layout Standard
23948 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
23953 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
23956 \begin_layout Section
23958 \begin_inset Index idx
23961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23970 \begin_layout Standard
23971 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
23984 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
23986 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
23987 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
23988 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
23990 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23996 \begin_layout Standard
23997 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
24001 \begin_inset space ~
24006 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
24009 \begin_layout Standard
24010 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
24011 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
24014 \begin_layout Standard
24015 This is a line with an inline formula
24016 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
24022 \begin_layout Standard
24023 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
24024 paragraph, like this one:
24025 \begin_inset Formula
24032 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
24035 \begin_layout Standard
24037 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
24039 For example, typing
24040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24053 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
24054 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
24058 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
24061 \begin_inset space ~
24069 \begin_layout Subsection
24070 Navigating in Formulas
24071 \begin_inset Index idx
24074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24083 \begin_layout Standard
24084 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
24085 achieved with the arrow keys.
24087 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
24088 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
24093 will leave a formula construct (a square root
24094 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
24098 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
24102 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24105 \end{array}\right]$
24113 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
24118 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
24119 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
24122 \begin_layout Standard
24127 , printed in this document as
24128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24132 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24139 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
24140 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
24141 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
24146 For example, if you want
24147 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
24155 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24165 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24169 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24174 , since in the latter case only the
24177 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
24182 will be under the square root sign:
24183 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
24189 \begin_layout Standard
24190 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
24192 \begin_inset Formula
24194 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24203 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
24204 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
24207 \begin_layout Subsection
24211 \begin_layout Standard
24212 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
24213 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
24217 and a cursor movement key to select text.
24218 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
24219 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
24220 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
24221 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
24225 \begin_layout Subsection
24226 Exponents and Subscripts
24227 \begin_inset Index idx
24230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24237 \begin_inset Index idx
24240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24249 \begin_layout Standard
24250 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
24253 arg "math-superscript"
24259 arg "math-subscript"
24262 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
24264 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
24267 , type in a formula
24270 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24280 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24286 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24290 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24296 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24302 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24311 , you have to use an extra
24315 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24316 For example, if you want
24317 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24323 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24329 Subscripts are similar: To get
24330 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24336 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24344 \begin_layout Subsection
24346 \begin_inset Index idx
24349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24358 \begin_layout Standard
24359 Create a fraction either with the command
24365 or by using the icon
24368 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24374 \begin_inset space ~
24380 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24381 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24382 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24387 To move back up, press
24392 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24393 \begin_inset Formula
24395 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24398 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24406 \begin_layout Subsection
24408 \begin_inset Index idx
24411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24420 \begin_layout Standard
24421 Roots can be created using the
24424 \begin_inset space ~
24432 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24438 arg "math-insert \\root"
24460 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24466 always produces a square root.
24469 \begin_layout Subsection
24470 Operators with Limits
24471 \begin_inset Index idx
24474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24481 \begin_inset Index idx
24484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24491 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24493 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24500 \begin_layout Standard
24502 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24506 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24509 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24510 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24511 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24512 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24513 The sum operator will automatically place its
24514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24521 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24523 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24527 \begin_inset Formula
24529 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24534 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24538 \begin_layout Standard
24539 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24541 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24542 behind the operator and using the menu
24544 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24545 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24547 \begin_inset space ~
24551 \begin_inset space ~
24565 \begin_layout Standard
24566 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24575 \begin_inset Index idx
24578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24585 \begin_inset Formula
24587 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24592 which will place the
24593 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24605 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24606 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24612 \begin_layout Standard
24613 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24620 Have a look at section
24621 \begin_inset space ~
24625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24627 reference "subsec:Functions"
24631 for an explanation of function macros.
24634 \begin_layout Subsection
24636 \begin_inset Index idx
24639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24648 \begin_layout Standard
24649 Most math symbols can be found in the
24652 \begin_inset space ~
24657 under one of several categories; including
24674 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24678 \begin_layout Standard
24679 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24680 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24681 don't have to use the
24684 \begin_inset space ~
24689 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24691 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24694 \begin_layout Subsection
24696 \begin_inset Index idx
24699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24708 \begin_layout Standard
24709 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24715 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24721 \begin_inset space ~
24729 arg "math-insert \\space"
24733 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24734 For example, the sequence
24739 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24742 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24744 \begin_inset Graphics
24745 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24750 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24751 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24752 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24753 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24754 , because they are negative
24756 Here are two examples:
24759 \begin_layout Standard
24769 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24775 \begin_layout Standard
24785 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24791 \begin_layout Subsection
24793 \begin_inset Index idx
24796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24803 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24805 name "subsec:Functions"
24812 \begin_layout Standard
24816 \begin_inset space ~
24821 contains under the button
24824 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24827 a number of function macros, such as
24828 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24832 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24840 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24847 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24848 avoid confusions, because
24849 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24853 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24859 \begin_layout Standard
24860 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24862 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24866 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24872 \begin_layout Standard
24873 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24874 are placed, as described in section
24875 \begin_inset space ~
24879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24881 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24888 \begin_layout Subsection
24890 \begin_inset Index idx
24893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24902 \begin_layout Standard
24903 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
24905 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
24906 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
24907 commands, for example, to enter
24908 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24911 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
24912 Our example is entered by typing
24917 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24924 \begin_inset space ~
24928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24930 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
24934 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
24937 \begin_layout Standard
24938 \begin_inset Float table
24943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24944 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24947 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24949 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
24953 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
24961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24963 \begin_inset Tabular
24964 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
24965 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24966 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24967 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24968 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25052 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25106 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
25116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25160 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
25170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25214 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
25224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25268 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25322 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25376 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25430 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25484 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25529 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25550 \begin_layout Standard
25551 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25554 \begin_inset space ~
25562 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25565 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25569 \begin_layout Section
25570 Brackets and Delimiters
25571 \begin_inset Index idx
25574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25581 \begin_inset Index idx
25584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25591 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25593 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25600 \begin_layout Standard
25601 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25603 For some purposes, using just the keys
25608 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25609 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25610 toolbar delimiter icon
25613 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25617 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25618 \begin_inset Formula
25620 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25628 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25629 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25633 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25636 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25642 \begin_inset Formula
25644 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25652 \begin_layout Standard
25653 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25654 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25658 \begin_layout Standard
25659 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25660 left side and right side.
25661 If you use the option
25664 \begin_inset space ~
25669 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25670 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25672 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25677 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25678 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25681 \begin_layout Standard
25682 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25683 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25684 is to go inside the brackets.
25685 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25690 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25691 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25692 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25696 arg "math-delim ( )"
25702 \begin_layout Section
25703 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25704 \begin_inset Index idx
25707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25714 \begin_inset Index idx
25717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25724 \begin_inset Index idx
25727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25728 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25736 \begin_layout Standard
25737 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25741 \begin_inset space ~
25749 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25753 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25754 Here is an example:
25755 \begin_inset Formula
25757 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25766 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25767 \begin_inset space ~
25771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25773 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25778 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25779 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25780 This alignment is set in the box
25785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25834 for every column as default.
25835 For example, the sequence
25836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25847 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25848 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25849 corresponds to the relevant column.
25850 The result will look like this:
25851 \begin_inset Formula
25854 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25855 column & has & has\,right\\
25856 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25865 \begin_layout Standard
25866 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25869 arg "newline-insert newline"
25872 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25873 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25875 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25878 or the math toolbar.
25881 \begin_layout Standard
25882 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25883 It can be created with the menu
25885 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25886 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25888 \begin_inset space ~
25900 Here is an example:
25901 \begin_inset Formula
25915 \begin_layout Standard
25916 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25919 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
25922 arg "newline-insert newline"
25926 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
25931 arg "newline-insert newline"
25934 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
25935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25942 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
25943 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
25944 A new row is created by every further entry of
25947 arg "newline-insert newline"
25951 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
25952 Here is an example:
25953 \begin_inset Formula
25955 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
25956 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
25961 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
25962 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
25963 \begin_inset Formula
25965 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
25973 \begin_layout Standard
25974 The multi-line formula type described here is called
25981 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
25982 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
25983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25985 reference "eq:asquared"
25990 The other types are described in section
25991 \begin_inset space ~
25995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25997 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26004 \begin_layout Section
26005 Formula Numbering and Referencing
26006 \begin_inset Index idx
26009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26010 Math ! Formula numbering
26016 \begin_inset Index idx
26019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26020 Math ! Referencing formulas
26026 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26028 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26035 \begin_layout Standard
26036 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
26038 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26039 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26041 \begin_inset space ~
26045 \begin_inset space ~
26053 arg "math-number-toggle"
26057 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26058 within parentheses.
26059 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
26060 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
26061 the document class.
26062 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
26063 separated by a dot:
26064 \begin_inset Formula
26074 arg "math-number-toggle"
26077 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
26078 You can only number displayed formulas.
26081 \begin_layout Standard
26082 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
26084 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26085 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26087 \begin_inset space ~
26091 \begin_inset space ~
26099 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
26102 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
26103 \begin_inset Formula
26106 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
26112 To number all lines use the shortcut
26115 arg "math-number-toggle"
26121 \begin_layout Standard
26122 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26125 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
26126 A label is inserted with the menu
26128 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26137 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
26138 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
26139 It is recommended that you use the suggested
26140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26151 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
26152 label type when you have many labels in your document.
26153 We inserted in the following example the label
26154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26161 in the second line:
26162 \begin_inset Formula
26164 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
26165 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
26170 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
26171 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
26172 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
26174 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26176 \begin_inset space ~
26184 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26188 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
26189 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26190 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
26191 as the formula number:
26194 \begin_layout Standard
26195 This is a cross-reference to equation (
26196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26198 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26205 \begin_layout Standard
26206 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
26207 's cross-reference box are described in section
26208 \begin_inset space ~
26212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26214 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26219 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
26227 \begin_layout Section
26228 User defined math macros
26229 \begin_inset Index idx
26232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26241 \begin_layout Standard
26243 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
26244 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
26245 Math macros are explained in section
26248 \begin_inset space ~
26260 \begin_layout Section
26264 \begin_layout Subsection
26266 \begin_inset Index idx
26269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26278 \begin_layout Standard
26279 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26280 To set a font in a formula, use the
26283 \begin_inset space ~
26291 arg "math-insert \\font"
26294 , or enter its command, listed in table
26295 \begin_inset space ~
26299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26301 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26308 \begin_layout Standard
26309 \begin_inset Float table
26314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26315 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26318 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26320 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26324 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26334 \begin_inset Tabular
26335 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26336 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26337 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26338 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26370 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26397 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26424 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26457 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26484 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26511 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26545 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26572 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26606 \begin_layout Standard
26607 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26615 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26631 \begin_layout Standard
26632 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26633 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26638 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26639 space when you need a space in the box.
26640 Here is an example where
26641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26652 denotes the set of numbers:
26653 \begin_inset Formula
26655 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26663 \begin_layout Standard
26664 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26665 You can, for example, put a character in
26674 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26678 \begin_inset Newline newline
26681 So it is better not to use this feature.
26684 \begin_layout Standard
26685 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26686 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26690 \begin_inset Newline newline
26693 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26699 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26700 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26706 \begin_layout Standard
26713 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26716 \begin_layout Standard
26717 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26719 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26720 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26722 \begin_inset space ~
26730 \begin_layout Subsection
26732 \begin_inset Index idx
26735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26744 \begin_layout Standard
26745 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26747 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26751 \begin_inset space ~
26755 \begin_inset space ~
26763 \begin_inset space ~
26771 arg "math-insert \\font"
26775 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26776 in black instead of blue.
26777 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26778 Here is an example:
26779 \begin_inset Formula
26782 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26783 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26792 \begin_layout Subsection
26794 \begin_inset Index idx
26797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26806 \begin_layout Standard
26807 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26808 automatically chosen in most situations.
26826 For most characters,
26834 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26835 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26840 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26841 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26842 thinks are appropriate.
26843 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26846 arg "math-insert \\style"
26850 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26851 For example, you can set
26852 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26855 , which is normally in
26864 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26868 The four styles are used in the following example:
26871 \begin_layout Standard
26872 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26876 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26880 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
26884 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
26890 \begin_layout Standard
26891 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
26892 is set in a particular size with the menu
26894 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26896 \begin_inset space ~
26901 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
26902 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
26903 will be adjusted to correspond.
26904 As an example here is a formula in the font size
26905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26915 \begin_layout Standard
26919 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
26925 \begin_layout Section
26926 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26928 \begin_inset Index idx
26931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26938 \begin_inset Index idx
26941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26950 \begin_layout Standard
26952 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
26953 that are in common use.
26956 \begin_layout Subsection
26957 Enabling AMS-Support
26960 \begin_layout Standard
26961 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
26962 the document by selecting the checkbox
26965 \begin_inset space ~
26969 \begin_inset space ~
26973 \begin_inset space ~
26980 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26984 \begin_inset Index idx
26987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26988 Document ! Settings
26996 \begin_inset space ~
27002 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27003 -errors in formulas,
27004 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
27007 \begin_layout Subsection
27009 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27011 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27016 \begin_inset Index idx
27019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27020 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27028 \begin_layout Standard
27029 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27030 provides a selection of different formula types.
27032 allows you to choose between
27053 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
27054 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27060 , for an explanation of these formula types.
27063 \begin_layout Chapter
27067 \begin_layout Section
27069 \begin_inset Index idx
27072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27079 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27081 name "sec:Cross-References"
27088 \begin_layout Standard
27089 One of \SpecialChar LyX
27090 's strengths is cross-references.
27091 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
27093 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
27094 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
27095 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
27098 \begin_layout Enumerate
27102 \begin_layout Enumerate
27103 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27105 name "enu:Second-item"
27112 \begin_layout Enumerate
27116 \begin_layout Standard
27117 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
27119 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27122 or by pressing the toolbar button
27129 A gray label box like this:
27130 \begin_inset Graphics
27131 filename clipart/label.png
27135 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
27137 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
27139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27172 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
27173 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
27175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27189 \begin_layout Standard
27190 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
27192 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27195 or the toolbar button
27198 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27202 A gray cross-reference box like this:
27203 \begin_inset Graphics
27204 filename clipart/reference.png
27208 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
27210 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
27211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27223 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
27227 \begin_layout Standard
27228 As an alternative to
27230 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27233 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
27238 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
27239 to the actual cursor position via the menu
27241 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27253 \begin_layout Standard
27254 Here is our cross-reference: Item
27255 \begin_inset space ~
27259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27261 reference "enu:Second-item"
27268 \begin_layout Standard
27269 It is recommended to use a protected space
27273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27274 described in section
27275 \begin_inset space ~
27279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27281 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27290 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27291 line breaks between them.
27294 \begin_layout Standard
27295 There are six formats of cross-references:
27298 \begin_layout Description
27299 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27302 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27309 \begin_layout Description
27310 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27311 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27323 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27330 \begin_layout Description
27331 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27332 \begin_inset space ~
27336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27337 LatexCommand pageref
27338 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27345 \begin_layout Description
27347 \begin_inset space ~
27351 \begin_inset space ~
27354 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27356 LatexCommand vpageref
27357 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27362 \begin_inset Newline newline
27365 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27366 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27367 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27368 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27369 it prints “on the next page”.
27370 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27373 \begin_layout Description
27375 \begin_inset space ~
27379 \begin_inset space ~
27383 \begin_inset space ~
27386 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27389 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27394 \begin_inset Newline newline
27397 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27403 ; otherwise it behaves like
27407 \begin_inset space ~
27411 \begin_inset space ~
27420 \begin_layout Description
27422 \begin_inset space ~
27425 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27426 \begin_inset Newline newline
27430 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27438 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27448 \begin_inset Index idx
27451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27453 -packages ! prettyref
27459 \begin_inset Index idx
27462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27464 -packages ! refstyle
27475 \begin_inset Newline newline
27478 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27479 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27482 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27486 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27487 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27495 is the default and preferred because
27499 supports only English documents.
27500 The format is specified by using the command
27512 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27513 preamble of the document.
27514 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27528 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414614
27536 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414616
27540 \begin_inset Newline newline
27547 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27550 \change_inserted 424524441 1484843594
27554 \begin_inset Newline newline
27557 Please note that neither
27565 (nor \SpecialChar LyX
27566 itself) predefines reference formats for all available types.
27567 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
27569 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
27570 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
27575 , you could do so as follows:
27576 \begin_inset Newline newline
27583 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
27590 \begin_inset Newline newline
27593 For more information about
27594 \change_inserted 424524441 1484843645
27595 defining formatted references
27596 \change_deleted 424524441 1484843647
27599 , have a look at the package documentation
27600 \change_deleted 424524441 1484843659
27604 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27606 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27611 \change_inserted 424524441 1484843594
27613 \begin_inset Newline newline
27616 The `Plural' and `Capitalized' options will be available with formatted
27617 references only if you are using the
27622 See its documentation, again, for more information.
27625 \begin_layout Description
27627 \begin_inset space ~
27630 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27632 LatexCommand nameref
27633 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27638 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414460
27642 \begin_layout Description
27644 \change_inserted 424524441 1483817846
27646 \begin_inset space ~
27649 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27650 label for the reference.
27651 This allows for customization, using ERT, if you want to issue a command
27652 that LyX does not support.
27657 , then you may want to use the
27658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27665 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
27667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27675 This is the form needed for, e.g.,
27680 \change_deleted 424524441 1483414539
27684 \begin_layout Standard
27685 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
27686 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27688 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27692 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27696 \begin_layout Standard
27697 You can only use the style
27701 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27705 is always possible.
27708 \begin_layout Standard
27709 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27710 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27712 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27713 \begin_inset space ~
27717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27719 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27726 \begin_layout Standard
27727 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27731 \begin_inset space ~
27735 \begin_inset space ~
27740 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27741 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27744 \begin_inset space ~
27749 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27750 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27753 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27759 \begin_layout Standard
27760 You can change labels at any time.
27761 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27762 do not need to think about this.
27765 \begin_layout Standard
27766 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27768 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27772 \begin_layout Standard
27773 References are described in detail in the section
27774 \begin_inset space ~
27784 \begin_inset space ~
27790 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27794 \begin_layout Standard
27796 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27797 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27802 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27807 It is recommended to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27813 \begin_inset Index idx
27816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27818 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27820 -packages ! refstyle
27830 \begin_inset Index idx
27833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27835 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27837 -packages ! prettyref
27842 does not know all of \SpecialChar LyX
27843 's possible label shortcuts
27847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27849 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27857 is for example \SpecialChar LyX
27858 's shortcut for labels in figure captions.
27863 and is not internationalized.
27873 \begin_layout Section
27874 Table of Contents and other Listings
27875 \begin_inset Index idx
27878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27885 \begin_inset Index idx
27888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27889 Navigating ! Outline
27895 \begin_inset Index idx
27898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27905 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27914 \begin_layout Subsection
27916 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27918 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27925 \begin_layout Standard
27926 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27928 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27929 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27931 \begin_inset space ~
27935 \begin_inset space ~
27941 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27943 If you click on it, the
27947 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27948 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27949 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27951 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27953 \begin_inset space ~
27958 that is described in section
27959 \begin_inset space ~
27963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27965 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
27972 \begin_layout Standard
27973 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
27974 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
27976 \begin_inset space ~
27980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27982 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
27986 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
27988 \begin_inset space ~
27992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27994 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
27998 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
28000 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
28003 \begin_layout Subsection
28004 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
28005 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28007 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
28014 \begin_layout Standard
28015 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
28017 You can insert them via the
28019 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28023 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
28026 \begin_layout Section
28027 URLs and Hyperlinks
28028 \begin_inset Index idx
28031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28038 \begin_inset Index idx
28041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28050 \begin_layout Subsection
28052 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28061 \begin_layout Standard
28062 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
28064 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28070 \begin_layout Standard
28071 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
28073 \begin_inset Flex URL
28076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28086 \begin_layout Standard
28087 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
28093 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
28097 \begin_layout Standard
28098 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28106 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28115 \begin_layout Subsection
28117 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28119 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
28126 \begin_layout Standard
28127 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
28129 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28132 or with the toolbar button
28139 The appearing dialog has two fields:
28148 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
28149 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
28150 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28152 name "LyX's homepage"
28153 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28157 , an Email address like this:
28158 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28160 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
28161 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
28166 , or a link to a file.
28169 \begin_layout Standard
28170 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
28172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28183 to the link target.
28186 \begin_layout Standard
28187 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
28188 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
28189 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
28190 the text style dialog.
28191 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
28195 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28197 name "LyX's homepage"
28198 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28205 \begin_layout Standard
28206 The link text color can be changed, when the option
28210 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
28212 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28213 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28217 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
28219 \begin_inset Newline newline
28227 \begin_inset Newline newline
28234 in the PDF Properties dialog.
28237 \begin_layout Section
28239 \begin_inset Index idx
28242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28249 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28251 name "sec:Appendices"
28258 \begin_layout Standard
28259 Appendices are created with the menu
28261 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28263 \begin_inset space ~
28267 \begin_inset space ~
28273 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
28274 as the appendix part of the book.
28275 This part is marked with a red borderline.
28278 \begin_layout Standard
28279 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
28280 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
28281 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
28282 and the subsection number.
28283 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
28287 \begin_layout Standard
28289 \begin_inset space ~
28293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28295 reference "chap:Credits"
28300 \begin_inset space ~
28304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28306 reference "subsec:Export"
28313 \begin_layout Section
28315 \begin_inset Index idx
28318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28325 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28327 name "sec:Bibliography"
28334 \begin_layout Standard
28335 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
28337 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880152
28339 \change_deleted -712698321 1483880151
28343 You can include a bibliography database,
28344 \change_deleted -712698321 1483880276
28349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28350 Known under the name
28351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28354 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28366 which is explained in
28367 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28368 the next subsection
28369 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890955
28371 \begin_inset space ~
28375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28377 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28386 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
28392 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28394 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883190
28398 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883197
28402 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890942
28406 \begin_inset space ~
28410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28412 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28417 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883212
28421 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28423 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28425 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880176
28428 author-year citations,
28429 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883518
28430 and if you have more than a handful of references,
28433 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28435 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883526
28436 should seriously consider
28443 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880298
28445 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28448 a bibliography database.
28449 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883092
28453 \begin_layout Standard
28455 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883578
28456 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28457 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28461 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28462 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28463 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28464 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28465 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28470 \begin_layout Subsection
28472 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885645
28473 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28475 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28481 The Bibliography Environment
28484 \begin_layout Standard
28489 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28491 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28500 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28503 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880726
28504 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28505 of ASCII characters only.
28508 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28518 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28519 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880732
28523 \begin_layout Standard
28524 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28526 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28529 or the toolbar button
28532 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28536 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28537 containing the available citations.
28538 Select one or more keys from the list and
28548 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28549 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28553 \begin_layout Standard
28554 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
28555 entry with surrounding brackets.
28560 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
28561 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28573 \begin_layout Standard
28577 Companion Second Edition
28580 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28582 key "latexcompanion"
28589 \begin_layout Standard
28590 The \SpecialChar LyX
28591 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28592 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28599 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880908
28603 \begin_layout Standard
28605 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881419
28606 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using
28611 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
28612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28623 Author A and Author B(Year)
28624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28631 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
28633 Then, if you select
28639 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28643 \begin_inset Index idx
28646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28648 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881295
28649 Document ! Settings
28656 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
28660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28662 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
28669 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
28674 \begin_layout Standard
28675 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28678 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28680 \begin_inset space ~
28688 arg "layout-paragraph"
28692 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28695 \begin_layout Subsection
28696 Bibliography databases
28697 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882661
28698 (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28702 \begin_inset Index idx
28705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28706 Bibliography ! Databases
28712 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882653
28714 \begin_inset Index idx
28717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28718 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28727 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28729 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28736 \begin_layout Standard
28737 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same
28738 \change_deleted -712698321 1483881524
28740 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881525
28743 in different documents.
28747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28748 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
28750 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
28751 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
28756 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
28758 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
28759 your working field in a database.
28760 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
28761 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
28762 list for that document.
28763 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
28767 \begin_layout Standard
28768 The database is a text file with the file extension
28769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28780 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
28781 The format is explained in
28782 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28788 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28790 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28792 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
28797 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
28798 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
28799 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
28801 \begin_inset Flex URL
28804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28806 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
28812 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881708
28816 \begin_layout Standard
28818 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885542
28820 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
28821 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28822 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
28824 It is quite established and mature, and there is a huge range of existing
28825 styles available, but it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to
28826 more complex bibliographic needs and support for specific languages and
28828 Those are addressed by a rather new and ambitious approach,
28837 reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28838 (although it has been significantly
28839 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28846 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882543
28851 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28852 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28853 might conversely fail to correctly
28854 handle databases that use specific
28865 ), but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
28869 \begin_layout Standard
28871 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882638
28872 Both approaches are described in turn.
28875 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28877 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882655
28878 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28880 \begin_inset Index idx
28883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28885 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882655
28886 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28897 \begin_layout Standard
28899 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882678
28901 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882681
28905 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882690
28906 via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28911 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28916 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28918 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882685
28922 \begin_inset space ~
28928 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
28929 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
28930 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882797
28931 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28941 Add bibliography to TOC
28943 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28948 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28949 in the document or just the cited references.
28952 \begin_layout Standard
28954 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882781
28955 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28958 style file is a text file with the file extension
28959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28970 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
28971 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28972 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
28973 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
28975 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
28980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28981 For information on how this is done, have a look at
28982 \begin_inset Newline newline
28986 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28988 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
28998 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883972
28999 In this document, we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29004 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
29010 \begin_layout Standard
29011 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
29012 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883993
29016 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29018 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883999
29020 \begin_inset Index idx
29023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29025 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884003
29026 Bibliography ! Biblatex
29034 \begin_layout Standard
29036 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884100
29037 Accessing a database via
29041 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29044 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29049 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29051 \begin_inset space ~
29057 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
29058 In this window you can add one or more databases, but as opposed to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29060 you cannot select a
29064 file (we will explain later, why).
29065 As with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29068 Add bibliography to TOC
29070 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
29075 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
29076 in the document or just the cited references.
29079 \begin_layout Standard
29081 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884492
29086 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (a text file with
29088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29099 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like, and a citation style
29101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29112 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
29113 Usually, such style files come in pairs, and it makes most sense to use
29114 matching styles, but it is possible to mix any citation style with any
29115 bibliography style.
29118 \begin_layout Standard
29120 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891283
29125 styles are not set in the
29128 \begin_inset space ~
29139 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29140 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29144 However, in the former dialog (in the
29148 field which is only visible if you use
29152 ), you can enter options that change the way the bibliography is displayed
29153 (for instance concerning its heading).
29154 These options are detailed in the
29159 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29170 \begin_layout Standard
29172 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885667
29173 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
29174 \begin_inset space ~
29178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29180 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29190 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29192 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885726
29193 Bibliography Processors
29196 \begin_layout Standard
29197 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
29199 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885808
29200 a bibliography processor, that is an external program that reads a database,
29201 sorts the citations and processes the data in a way it can be included
29206 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885822
29208 \change_deleted -712698321 1483885823
29212 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885903
29218 As the whole approach, it has the advantage that it is very mature and
29219 widespread, but the disadvantage that it has severe limitations, due to
29223 \begin_layout Standard
29225 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885977
29226 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address (some of)
29228 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
29229 \change_deleted -712698321 1483885997
29230 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29235 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886029
29236 do this on a general level in
29238 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29239 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29240 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29243 , or for individual documents
29244 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886038
29245 choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
29254 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29255 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29257 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886043
29262 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29263 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29264 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29270 The following variants are
29271 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886168
29273 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886173
29274 available by default
29279 \begin_layout Description
29281 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886257
29282 a specific, modern processor developed exclusively for
29286 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29294 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory
29295 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886272
29296 , but does not work with other bibliography packages (e.
29297 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29301 \begin_inset space \space{}
29308 ), only with the package
29311 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886347
29314 and many specific features
29321 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886353
29322 recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
29324 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886386
29329 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
29338 \begin_layout Description
29339 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
29340 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
29341 with all bibliography packages,
29342 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886412
29344 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886414
29348 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886476
29349 it will probably fail with even moderately sized
29350 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886506
29352 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886506
29358 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886524
29361 bibliographies, due to the limited memory.
29366 \begin_layout Description
29367 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
29368 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886652
29369 (but no Unicode support)
29371 , larger memory than
29375 , works with all bibliography packages
29376 \change_inserted -712698321 1484330876
29377 , although more complex
29381 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
29385 features are supported.
29388 \begin_layout Standard
29390 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331301
29392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29399 bibliography processor set in
29401 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29402 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29413 bibliography processor in
29415 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29416 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29417 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29420 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29421 selects the most appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliogra
29430 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29431 -based bibliography styles).
29432 This should suit most needs.
29437 \begin_layout Standard
29439 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331395
29440 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29441 By default, this is
29449 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29450 You can adjust it in
29452 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29453 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29454 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29462 \begin_layout Standard
29464 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886683
29465 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29467 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331419
29468 Selected bibliography processors
29470 can be controlled with options that you can add below the
29471 \change_deleted -712698321 1484331437
29472 specification of the variants
29473 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331439
29477 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29479 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886810
29483 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886842
29486 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29488 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886842
29494 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886972
29496 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29503 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886836
29515 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887134
29519 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29521 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887497
29527 \begin_layout Standard
29529 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887548
29531 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29534 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887556
29535 When you select the option
29537 Sectioned bibliography
29541 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29542 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29545 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
29549 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887559
29551 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887559
29555 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887560
29559 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887564
29562 are explained in detail in section
29564 Customizing Bibliographies
29568 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29573 Additional Features
29578 \begin_layout Standard
29580 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882904
29581 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
29582 the two methods of creating them.
29583 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29584 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29585 We used the style file
29589 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
29594 \begin_layout Subsection
29596 \begin_inset Index idx
29599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29600 Bibliography ! Citation format
29606 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881374
29608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29610 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29619 \begin_layout Standard
29621 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888028
29622 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29623 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29627 numerical citation (as used in this document), alpha-numerical citations
29629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29636 ) or author-year citations (as
29637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29646 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29650 \begin_layout Standard
29652 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888432
29653 By default, a simple numeric citation style (as in this document) is used.
29656 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29660 \begin_inset Index idx
29663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29665 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888079
29666 Document ! Settings
29673 \SpecialChar menuseparator
29676 , however, you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred
29677 bibliography approach.
29680 \begin_layout Standard
29682 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888408
29687 environment, your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29692 , which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29696 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29703 \begin_layout Standard
29705 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888505
29706 All other choices require a database approach, either Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29714 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29722 Currently, the following options are available:
29725 \begin_layout Itemize
29727 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888574
29734 BibTeX-based approached without any additional packages (simple numeric
29738 \begin_layout Itemize
29740 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889266
29749 package and lets you select a style in the combo boxes
29751 Biblatex citation style
29755 Biblatex bibliography style
29758 Many different style variants are supported.
29763 package can be entered in the
29770 \begin_layout Itemize
29772 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889302
29775 Biblatex (natbib mode)
29782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29785 natbib compatibility mode
29786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29790 This is a specific variant that is aimed at users who switch an existing
29795 (see below) or want to emulate
29799 behavior very closely.
29804 , this option has some additional styles.
29805 Style selection and option handling are identical.
29810 styles are also supported by this variant.
29813 \begin_layout Itemize
29815 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889321
29824 package which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
29827 \begin_layout Itemize
29829 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891582
29838 package which provides citation styles particularly suited for the Humanities.
29843 \begin_layout Standard
29845 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891665
29854 furthermore provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
29856 You have to select either of it in the dialog.
29861 case, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
29863 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
29864 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected style (however, when switching
29866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29881 , a suitable style is proposed).
29886 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
29890 \begin_layout Standard
29892 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890338
29893 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
29895 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890143
29897 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890144
29900 n the citation reference dialog
29901 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890163
29902 you can set a special citation format
29906 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891709
29907 Some selections also provide further options, such as the option to uppercase
29908 a name prefix such as
29909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29924 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
29925 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29928 e., use or don't use
29929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29938 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890219
29939 For this feature you need to enable the option
29945 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29949 \begin_inset Index idx
29952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29953 Document ! Settings
29963 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
29964 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29965 style files as explained in
29966 the previous section.
29971 \begin_layout Standard
29973 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890476
29974 In the citation dialog,
29975 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890481
29977 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890482
29980 ou can also set text to appear
29981 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890531
29984 after a citation reference,
29985 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890545
29986 in the citation reference window
29987 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890583
29989 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29993 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
29995 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30011 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890682
30013 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890683
30016 example where the text
30017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30021 \begin_inset space ~
30025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30028 appears after the reference:
30031 \begin_layout Quote
30033 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30036 key "latexcompanion"
30041 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890690
30045 \begin_layout Standard
30047 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891777
30048 All styles except for
30052 also provide a means to add text that precedes the reference (such as
30053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30061 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
30067 \begin_layout Section
30069 \begin_inset Index idx
30072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30079 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30088 \begin_layout Standard
30089 An index entry is created if you use the menu
30091 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30093 \begin_inset space ~
30098 or the toolbar button
30105 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
30106 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
30107 by \SpecialChar LyX
30108 as the index entry.
30111 \begin_layout Standard
30112 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
30114 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30115 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30117 \begin_inset space ~
30123 A light blue box labeled
30124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30135 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
30136 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
30140 \begin_layout Standard
30141 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
30142 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30143 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
30144 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30146 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30148 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
30155 \begin_layout Subsection
30156 Grouping Index Entries
30157 \begin_inset Index idx
30160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30169 \begin_layout Standard
30170 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
30172 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
30173 lists under the entry
30174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30182 First we create the entry
30183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30191 \begin_inset space ~
30195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30197 reference "subsec:Lists"
30202 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
30203 \begin_inset space ~
30207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30209 reference "sec:Itemize"
30213 , we insert the command
30216 \begin_layout Standard
30222 \begin_layout Standard
30226 \begin_layout Standard
30232 \begin_layout Standard
30233 for the enumerated list in section
30234 \begin_inset space ~
30238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30240 reference "sec:Enumerate"
30247 \begin_layout Standard
30248 The exclamation mark
30249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30256 marks the grouping levels.
30257 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
30258 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
30259 If we don't have an index entry for
30260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30267 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
30270 \begin_layout Subsection
30272 \begin_inset Index idx
30275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30276 Index ! Page ranges
30284 \begin_layout Standard
30285 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
30287 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
30288 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
30289 an index entry in section
30290 \begin_inset space ~
30294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30296 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
30303 \begin_layout Standard
30306 Paragraph environments|(
30309 \begin_layout Standard
30310 and another entry at the end of section
30311 \begin_inset space ~
30315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30317 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
30324 \begin_layout Standard
30327 Paragraph environments|)
30330 \begin_layout Standard
30332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30355 respectively start and end the index range.
30356 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30357 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30358 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30359 An example is the index entry
30360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30363 Document ! Settings
30364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30370 \begin_layout Subsection
30372 \begin_inset Index idx
30375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30376 Index ! Cross referencing
30384 \begin_layout Standard
30385 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30386 We referred for example in the index entry
30387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30395 \begin_inset space ~
30399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30401 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30405 ) to the index entry
30406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30413 in the same section using the entry
30416 \begin_layout Standard
30419 GIF|see{Image formats}
30422 \begin_layout Standard
30423 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30425 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30426 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30429 \begin_layout Subsection
30431 \begin_inset Index idx
30434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30435 Index ! Entry order
30443 \begin_layout Standard
30444 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30445 follow the rules for the index order.
30446 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30452 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30454 \begin_inset space ~
30458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30460 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30469 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30470 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30495 \begin_inset Index idx
30498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30499 Dummy entries ! maïs
30505 \begin_inset Index idx
30508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30509 Dummy entries ! maître
30515 \begin_inset Index idx
30518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30519 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30524 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30525 maïs, maison, maître.
30526 To achieve this, we use the command
30529 \begin_layout Standard
30532 previous entry@current entry
30535 \begin_layout Standard
30536 In our case we want to have
30537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30552 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30555 \begin_layout Standard
30561 \begin_layout Standard
30562 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30563 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30565 See the next subsection for an example.
30568 \begin_layout Standard
30569 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30575 \begin_layout Standard
30576 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
30581 to generate the index (see section
30582 \begin_inset space ~
30586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30588 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30597 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30598 -package aeguill in section
30599 \begin_inset space ~
30603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30605 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
30609 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
30610 -packages although all these index
30611 commands start with
30612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30625 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
30630 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
30633 \begin_layout Standard
30645 \begin_layout Standard
30657 \begin_layout Subsection
30659 \begin_inset Index idx
30662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30663 Index ! Entry layout
30671 \begin_layout Standard
30672 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30673 \begin_inset Index idx
30676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30679 This is an italic dummy entry
30684 You can also format the page number using the character
30685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30692 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30693 -command without a backslash.
30694 We can write for example
30697 \begin_layout Standard
30700 italic page number:|textit
30703 \begin_layout Standard
30704 to get the page number in italic.
30705 \begin_inset Index idx
30708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30709 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30714 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30715 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30733 \begin_inset space ~
30739 Have a look at section
30740 \begin_inset space ~
30744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30746 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30750 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30754 \begin_layout Standard
30755 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30763 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30767 to generate the index, see section
30768 \begin_inset space ~
30772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30774 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30783 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30788 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30789 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30792 key "latexcompanion"
30804 \begin_layout Standard
30805 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30807 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30808 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30809 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30810 If so, put the following in the preamble
30813 \begin_layout Standard
30825 \begin_layout Standard
30829 \begin_layout Standard
30835 \begin_layout Standard
30836 in the index entry.
30837 \begin_inset Index idx
30840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30841 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30846 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30847 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30848 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30851 \begin_layout Standard
30852 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30853 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30854 a bold font for all index entries.
30855 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30867 documentation for details,
30868 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30870 key "makeindex,xindy"
30877 \begin_layout Subsection
30879 \begin_inset Index idx
30882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30889 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30891 name "subsec:Index-Program"
30898 \begin_layout Standard
30899 If the index generation program
30903 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
30904 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
30908 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30909 distribution, is used.
30913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30918 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
30919 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
30920 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
30921 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
30922 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
30932 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
30934 dialog, see section
30935 \begin_inset space ~
30939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30941 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30946 The available options are listed and explained in
30947 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30949 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
30954 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
30958 \begin_layout Standard
30959 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
30960 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
30963 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30964 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30968 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
30969 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
30972 \begin_layout Subsection
30976 \begin_layout Standard
30977 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
30978 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
30979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30986 next to the standard index.
30988 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
30989 that add this feature.
30996 \begin_inset Index idx
30999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31001 -packages ! splitidx
31006 package to generate multiple indexes.
31007 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
31012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31013 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
31015 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31022 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31023 style, but it also includes
31024 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
31025 Please consult the package's manual for details.
31033 \begin_layout Standard
31034 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
31035 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
31037 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31038 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31041 and select the option
31043 Use multiple Indexes
31050 already contains the standard index
31051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31059 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
31060 also appear as a heading) to the
31064 input field and press the
31069 The new index now also appears in the list.
31070 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
31071 label color to the new index.
31074 \begin_layout Standard
31075 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
31078 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31085 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
31086 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
31087 are additional features:
31090 \begin_layout Itemize
31091 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
31092 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
31095 \begin_layout Itemize
31096 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
31097 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
31098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31105 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
31106 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
31107 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
31108 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
31111 \begin_layout Section
31112 Nomenclature/Glossary
31113 \begin_inset Index idx
31116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31123 \begin_inset Index idx
31126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31155 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31157 name "sec:Nomenclature"
31164 \begin_layout Standard
31165 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
31166 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
31167 called nomenclature or glossary.
31170 \begin_layout Standard
31171 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31178 \begin_inset Index idx
31181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31183 -packages ! nomencl
31189 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31191 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31197 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31201 \begin_layout Standard
31202 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
31203 and then use the menu
31205 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31211 \begin_inset space ~
31216 or the toolbar button
31219 arg "nomencl-insert"
31224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31235 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
31238 \begin_layout Standard
31239 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
31240 The first is the term or
31244 that you wish to define.
31249 of the term or symbol.
31252 \begin_layout Standard
31253 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31261 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
31262 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
31270 \begin_layout Subsection
31271 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
31272 \begin_inset Index idx
31275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31276 Nomenclature ! Layout
31284 \begin_layout Standard
31285 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
31289 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
31292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31296 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31304 \begin_inset Newline newline
31312 \begin_inset Newline newline
31318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31325 character starts/ends the formula.
31326 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31327 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
31329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31339 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31349 \begin_layout Standard
31350 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31351 -syntax is given in section
31352 \begin_inset space ~
31356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31358 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31365 \begin_layout Standard
31369 \begin_inset space ~
31374 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31376 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31381 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31388 in this document is:
31389 \begin_inset Newline newline
31394 dummy entry for the character
31399 \begin_inset Newline newline
31411 \begin_inset space ~
31421 font use the command
31450 \begin_layout Standard
31451 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31452 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31456 \begin_inset space \space{}
31460 \begin_inset Newline newline
31476 \begin_inset Newline newline
31479 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31480 This command will make the font of all symbols
31487 \begin_inset space ~
31495 \begin_layout Standard
31496 If the characters |
31497 \begin_inset space \space{}
31501 \begin_inset space \space{}
31505 \begin_inset space \space{}
31509 \begin_inset space \space{}
31513 \begin_inset space \space{}
31516 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
31517 a quote character in front of them.
31518 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31519 LatexCommand nomenclature
31520 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31521 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
31528 \begin_layout Subsection
31529 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31530 \begin_inset Index idx
31533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31534 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31542 \begin_layout Standard
31543 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31544 -code of the symbol
31546 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31548 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31551 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31552 LatexCommand nomenclature
31554 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31561 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31565 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31566 LatexCommand nomenclature
31569 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31574 They will be sorted by
31575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31601 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31604 will be sorted before the
31608 since the character
31609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31616 is considered in sorting.
31619 \begin_layout Standard
31620 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31623 \begin_inset space ~
31628 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31629 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31631 For the example given, you can insert
31635 in this field for the
31636 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31643 will be located before
31644 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31650 \begin_layout Standard
31651 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31656 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31665 \begin_layout Subsection
31666 Nomenclature Options
31667 \begin_inset Index idx
31670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31671 Nomenclature ! Options
31679 \begin_layout Standard
31684 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31685 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31688 \begin_layout Description
31689 refeq Appends the phrase
31690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31705 to every nomenclature entry, where
31711 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31714 \begin_layout Description
31715 refpage Appends the phrase
31716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31731 to every nomenclature entry, where
31737 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31740 \begin_layout Description
31741 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31744 \begin_layout Standard
31745 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31746 class options list in the
31748 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31752 In this document the options
31759 \begin_layout Standard
31760 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31766 \begin_layout Standard
31767 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31768 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31773 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31776 \begin_layout Description
31786 \begin_layout Description
31789 nomrefpage Like the
31796 \begin_layout Description
31799 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31808 \begin_layout Description
31812 \begin_inset space ~
31818 \begin_inset space ~
31823 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31826 \begin_layout Standard
31828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31835 are automatically translated for some document languages.
31836 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31840 \begin_layout Standard
31848 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
31851 \begin_inset Newline newline
31858 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
31863 \begin_inset Newline newline
31867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31882 by their translation.
31885 \begin_layout Subsection
31886 Printing the Nomenclature
31887 \begin_inset Index idx
31890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31891 Nomenclature ! Printing
31899 \begin_layout Standard
31900 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
31902 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31903 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31919 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
31920 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
31921 You can choose between these settings:
31924 \begin_layout Description
31925 Default a space of 1
31926 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31932 \begin_layout Description
31934 \begin_inset space ~
31938 \begin_inset space ~
31941 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
31944 \begin_layout Description
31945 Custom custom space
31948 \begin_layout Standard
31949 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
31950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31958 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
31966 For example, in order to change the name to
31970 , add the following line to the preamble:
31973 \begin_layout Standard
31981 nomname}{List of Symbols}
31984 \begin_layout Subsection
31985 Nomenclature Program
31986 \begin_inset Index idx
31989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31990 Nomenclature ! Program
31996 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31998 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
32005 \begin_layout Standard
32011 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32012 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
32014 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
32019 by adding options, see section
32020 \begin_inset space ~
32024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32026 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32031 The available options are listed and explained in
32032 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32034 key "nomencl,makeindex"
32041 \begin_layout Section
32043 \begin_inset Index idx
32046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32053 \begin_inset Index idx
32056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32057 Document ! Branches
32063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32065 name "sec:Branches"
32072 \begin_layout Standard
32073 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
32074 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
32075 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
32076 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
32079 \begin_layout Standard
32080 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
32081 allows you to put text into branches.
32082 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
32083 To create a branch, either select the menu
32085 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32086 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
32089 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
32091 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32098 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
32099 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
32100 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
32101 and whether the name of the branch should
32102 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
32103 (see below for an example).
32104 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
32105 to the name of the other) and to add
32106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32114 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32118 \begin_inset space ~
32121 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
32122 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
32125 \begin_layout Standard
32126 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
32127 These boxes are inserted via the menu
32129 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32132 where you can choose a branch.
32133 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
32137 \begin_layout Standard
32138 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
32139 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
32142 \begin_layout Standard
32143 \begin_inset Branch Question
32147 \begin_layout Standard
32148 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
32156 \begin_layout Standard
32157 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32161 \begin_layout Standard
32162 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
32170 \begin_layout Standard
32177 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32178 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32181 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
32182 Consider for example a file
32183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32190 which has the above branches.
32192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32199 is active, the PDF export file would be called
32200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32223 branch were inactive,
32224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32239 branch was active, likewise
32240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32255 branch was active, and
32256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32259 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
32260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32263 if both branches were active.
32264 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
32265 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296009
32269 \begin_layout Standard
32271 \change_inserted 424524441 1468297080
32272 As of LyX 2.3.0, there are also
32273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32280 branch insets, whose content is output just in case the branch is
32286 \begin_inset Branch Question
32290 \begin_layout Standard
32292 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296217
32293 For example, this material will only appear when the Question branch is
32301 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
32302 To control whether a particular inset is
32303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32310 , right-click on the inset button and choose
32311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32317 \change_inserted 424524441 1468297080
32319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32323 \change_deleted 424524441 1468296150
32327 \begin_layout Standard
32328 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32334 \begin_layout Standard
32335 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
32336 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32337 definitions for each branch.
32338 For example you can define for the question branch
32342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32343 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32344 -syntax, see section
32345 \begin_inset space ~
32349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32351 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32363 \begin_layout Standard
32373 \begin_layout Standard
32383 \begin_layout Standard
32384 and for the answer branch
32387 \begin_layout Standard
32397 \begin_layout Standard
32407 \begin_layout Standard
32408 \begin_inset Branch Question
32412 \begin_layout Standard
32416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32444 \begin_layout Standard
32445 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32449 \begin_layout Standard
32453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32481 \begin_layout Standard
32482 Now it is possible to use the
32486 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32493 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32496 commands to obtain conditional output.
32497 Here is an example formula where only the
32504 \begin_inset Formula
32506 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32514 \begin_layout Standard
32515 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32523 \begin_layout Standard
32524 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32526 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32530 \begin_inset space \space{}
32533 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32535 For this advanced usage, see the
32541 Flex insets and InsetLayout
32546 \begin_layout Section
32548 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32550 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
32555 \begin_inset Index idx
32558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32567 \begin_layout Standard
32570 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32571 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32574 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
32576 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32582 \begin_inset Index idx
32585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32587 -packages ! hyperref
32592 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
32593 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
32594 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
32595 part of the document.
32599 \begin_layout Standard
32600 The header information in the dialog tab
32604 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
32605 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
32606 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
32607 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32611 \begin_inset space ~
32615 \begin_inset space ~
32620 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32621 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32622 and author entries.
32626 \begin_inset space ~
32630 \begin_inset space ~
32634 \begin_inset space ~
32639 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32642 \begin_layout Standard
32643 You can specify in the dialog tab
32647 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32652 \begin_inset space ~
32656 \begin_inset space ~
32660 \begin_inset space ~
32665 option allows long links to be split;
32668 \begin_inset space ~
32672 \begin_inset space ~
32676 \begin_inset space ~
32684 \begin_inset space ~
32689 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32692 \begin_inset space ~
32697 colors the different links.
32698 The default colors are:
32701 \begin_layout Labeling
32702 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32707 for hyperlinks and URLs
32710 \begin_layout Labeling
32711 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32719 \begin_layout Labeling
32720 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32728 \begin_layout Standard
32729 but you can change these in the field
32734 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
32737 \begin_layout Standard
32740 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
32743 \begin_layout Standard
32748 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
32749 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
32750 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
32753 \begin_layout Standard
32758 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
32759 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
32760 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
32770 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
32771 when opening the PDF.
32773 \begin_inset space ~
32776 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
32777 \begin_inset space ~
32780 1 will only display the sections.
32783 \begin_layout Standard
32784 PDF properties are also used in this document.
32785 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
32791 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
32792 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32801 \begin_layout Section
32803 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32805 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32807 name "sec:TeX-Code"
32814 \begin_layout Subsection
32817 \begin_inset Index idx
32820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32828 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32830 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
32837 \begin_layout Standard
32838 As \SpecialChar LyX
32839 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
32840 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
32841 commands and constructs,
32844 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
32845 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
32846 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
32847 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32848 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
32849 cannot support all packages and
32853 \begin_layout Standard
32854 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
32855 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
32856 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
32860 Code box is created by the menu
32862 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32864 \begin_inset space ~
32869 or by the toolbar button
32882 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
32890 \begin_layout Standard
32891 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
32893 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
32895 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
32896 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32903 , you can write the command part
32909 in a \SpecialChar TeX
32910 Code box before the word and the closing brace
32914 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
32915 Code box behind the word.
32916 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
32917 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
32921 \begin_layout Standard
32922 \begin_inset Graphics
32923 filename clipart/ERT.png
32931 \begin_layout Standard
32935 \begin_layout Standard
32936 This is a line with a
32940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32963 \begin_layout Standard
32964 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32972 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32973 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
32974 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
32975 know that the command is finished.
32983 \begin_layout Subsection
32984 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32986 \begin_inset Argument 1
32989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32990 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32997 \begin_inset Index idx
33000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33008 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33010 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33017 \begin_layout Standard
33018 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
33019 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33020 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
33021 uses in the background.
33022 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
33023 is based on commands, you can
33024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33032 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
33033 any time if you know the right commands.
33034 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
33035 is the end of the day.
33036 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
33037 all caption labels bold.
33038 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
33040 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
33044 \begin_layout Standard
33045 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
33047 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33049 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33052 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33061 \begin_layout Standard
33062 As result you find that the package
33067 \begin_inset Index idx
33070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33072 -packages ! caption
33078 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
33080 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33083 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33087 \begin_inset space ~
33095 \begin_layout Standard
33100 usepackage[options]{package name}
33103 \begin_layout Standard
33104 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
33105 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
33106 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
33107 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
33110 \begin_layout Standard
33111 In your case the package name is
33116 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
33121 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
33122 So you add the command
33125 \begin_layout Standard
33130 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
33133 \begin_layout Standard
33134 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
33138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33139 For more commands provided by the
33143 package, have a look at its documentation,
33144 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33158 \begin_layout Standard
33159 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
33161 For example if you use a
33165 class, you don't need the package
33169 , you can instead write
33172 \begin_layout Standard
33177 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
33182 \begin_layout Standard
33183 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
33184 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
33185 documentation of the document class you want to use.
33192 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
33195 \begin_layout Standard
33196 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
33197 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
33199 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33200 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
33201 Code box as described in the previous
33205 \begin_layout Standard
33206 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
33207 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33210 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33212 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
33219 \begin_layout Standard
33220 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
33226 \begin_layout Standard
33230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33240 \begin_inset Note Note
33243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33244 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
33252 \begin_layout Left Header
33253 \begin_inset Argument 1
33256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33276 \begin_inset Note Note
33279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33280 defines the header line as described below
33288 \begin_layout Center Header
33289 \begin_inset Argument 1
33292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33301 \begin_layout Right Header
33302 \begin_inset Argument 1
33305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33326 \begin_layout Left Footer
33327 \begin_inset Argument 1
33330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33351 \begin_layout Center Footer
33352 \begin_inset Argument 1
33355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33367 \begin_inset Newline newline
33371 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33377 \begin_layout Right Footer
33378 \begin_inset Argument 1
33381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33403 \begin_layout Section
33404 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33405 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33407 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33412 \begin_inset Index idx
33415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33416 Document ! Header/Footer line
33422 \begin_inset Index idx
33425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33434 \begin_layout Standard
33435 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33439 \begin_inset space ~
33450 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33456 \begin_inset space ~
33462 As a second step add in the menu
33464 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33465 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33474 Custom Header/Footerlines
33477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33481 This module offers the following 6
33482 \begin_inset space ~
33488 \begin_layout Description
33490 \begin_inset space ~
33494 \begin_inset space ~
33498 \begin_inset space ~
33502 \begin_inset space ~
33506 \begin_inset space ~
33512 \begin_layout Description
33514 \begin_inset space ~
33518 \begin_inset space ~
33522 \begin_inset space ~
33526 \begin_inset space ~
33530 \begin_inset space ~
33536 \begin_layout Standard
33537 for the different positions in the header/footer.
33538 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
33541 \begin_layout Standard
33542 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
33543 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
33545 \begin_inset space ~
33549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33551 reference "fig:Page-layout"
33555 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
33558 \begin_layout Standard
33559 \begin_inset Float figure
33565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33568 \begin_inset Tabular
33569 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
33570 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
33571 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33572 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33573 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33575 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
33587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33593 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33604 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33622 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33633 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33637 The normal text on the page goes here.
33638 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33640 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33641 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33646 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33655 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33666 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33684 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33695 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
33707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33713 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33731 \begin_inset Caption Standard
33733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33734 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33736 name "fig:Page-layout"
33740 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
33753 \begin_layout Standard
33754 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33762 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
33766 \begin_inset space ~
33771 is set to “Default”.
33772 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
33781 \begin_layout Subsection
33785 \begin_layout Standard
33786 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
33787 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
33788 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
33789 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
33791 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
33793 Defining the footer line works similarly.
33796 \begin_layout Standard
33797 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
33798 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33802 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33804 \begin_inset space ~
33812 \begin_layout Description
33815 thepage prints the current page number
33818 \begin_layout Description
33821 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
33824 \begin_layout Description
33827 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
33830 \begin_layout Description
33833 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
33834 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
33837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33841 \begin_inset Quotes prd
33844 because it usually goes in a left header.
33847 \begin_layout Description
33850 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
33851 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
33853 It is normally used in the right header.
33856 \begin_layout Subsection
33857 Default header/footer
33860 \begin_layout Standard
33861 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
33862 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
33863 footer has the page number.
33864 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
33865 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
33866 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
33869 \begin_inset space ~
33877 \begin_layout Subsection
33881 \begin_layout Standard
33882 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
33883 Some pages are different.
33884 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
33885 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
33886 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
33887 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
33888 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
33891 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33892 Header and footer decoration line
33895 \begin_layout Standard
33896 By default, you get a 0.4
33897 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33900 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
33901 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
33913 in the following way:
33916 \begin_layout Standard
33923 headrulewidth}{thickness}
33926 \begin_layout Standard
33927 where thickness is a size in standard units like
33940 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
33941 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33947 \begin_layout Standard
33948 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33950 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
33951 \begin_inset space ~
33955 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33964 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33965 Several header/footer lines
33968 \begin_layout Standard
33969 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
33970 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
33971 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
33973 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33988 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33989 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33991 \begin_inset space ~
33999 \begin_layout Standard
34006 headheight}{height}
34009 \begin_layout Standard
34014 is a size in standard units (e.
34015 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34019 \begin_inset space \space{}
34027 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
34028 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
34029 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34030 logfile with the menu
34032 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34034 \begin_inset space ~
34042 \begin_inset space ~
34047 to see if you can find a warning about the package
34052 \begin_inset Index idx
34055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34057 -packages ! fancyhdr
34063 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
34064 for your header/footer.
34067 \begin_layout Subsection
34071 \begin_layout Standard
34072 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
34073 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
34074 This example consists of the following definition:
34077 \begin_layout Description
34079 \begin_inset space ~
34088 , empty optional argument
34091 \begin_layout Description
34093 \begin_inset space ~
34096 Header empty, empty optional argument
34099 \begin_layout Description
34101 \begin_inset space ~
34110 in the optional argument
34113 \begin_layout Description
34115 \begin_inset space ~
34124 in the optional argument
34127 \begin_layout Description
34129 \begin_inset space ~
34142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34146 \begin_inset Newline newline
34150 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34157 in the optional argument
34160 \begin_layout Description
34162 \begin_inset space ~
34171 , empty optional argument
34174 \begin_layout Description
34177 headrulewidth set to 2
34178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34184 \begin_layout Standard
34185 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
34186 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
34192 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34201 \begin_layout Standard
34202 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34208 \begin_layout Standard
34212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34216 pagestyle{headings}
34222 \begin_inset Note Note
34225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34226 switches back to page style with the default headings
34234 \begin_layout Section
34235 Previewing Snippets of your Document
34236 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34238 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34243 \begin_inset Index idx
34246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34253 \begin_inset Index idx
34256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34265 \begin_layout Standard
34267 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
34268 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
34269 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
34272 \begin_layout Subsection
34276 \begin_layout Standard
34277 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34283 \begin_inset Index idx
34286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34288 -packages ! preview-latex
34293 (on some systems named simply
34298 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34300 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34306 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34308 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
34316 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
34317 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34318 -package are automatically
34319 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
34323 \begin_layout Subsection
34327 \begin_layout Standard
34328 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34329 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34331 activate the option
34334 \begin_inset space ~
34341 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34347 \begin_inset space ~
34351 \begin_inset space ~
34354 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34361 \begin_inset space ~
34374 \begin_inset space ~
34379 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34382 \begin_layout Standard
34383 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34388 \begin_inset space ~
34396 \begin_inset space ~
34404 \begin_layout Standard
34405 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34406 and when you finish
34410 \begin_layout Standard
34411 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34419 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34420 generated by activating the option
34423 \begin_inset space ~
34429 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34437 \begin_layout Subsection
34438 Selected document parts
34441 \begin_layout Standard
34442 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34443 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34444 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34445 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34447 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34449 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34453 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34454 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34455 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34458 \begin_layout Standard
34459 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34466 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34478 is explained in section
34480 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34485 \begin_inset space ~
34495 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34496 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34497 the final rotated boxes,
34498 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34499 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34501 Here is the result:
34504 \begin_layout Standard
34505 \begin_inset Preview
34507 \begin_layout Standard
34512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34516 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
34522 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
34532 height_special "totalheight"
34537 backgroundcolor "none"
34540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34565 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
34571 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
34578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34593 \begin_layout Standard
34594 Previewing works also for colors.
34595 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34614 is explained in section
34621 \begin_inset space ~
34634 \begin_layout Standard
34635 \begin_inset Preview
34637 \begin_layout Standard
34641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34660 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34665 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34684 \begin_layout Standard
34685 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34691 \begin_layout Standard
34692 If \SpecialChar LyX
34693 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34694 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34695 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34696 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34697 packages in your document preamble that are required by
34698 the \SpecialChar TeX
34700 If \SpecialChar LyX
34701 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
34702 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
34704 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
34705 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
34706 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
34709 \begin_layout Subsection
34714 \begin_layout Standard
34715 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34716 source of the whole document or parts of it.
34719 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34721 \begin_inset space ~
34726 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34728 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
34730 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
34731 's main window, then only this selection
34732 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
34733 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
34734 the source view window.
34739 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
34740 ; but note that if you have
34741 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
34743 not just the one which is open at the time.
34746 \begin_layout Section
34747 Advanced Find and Replace
34748 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34750 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34755 \begin_inset Index idx
34758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34765 \begin_inset Index idx
34768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34777 \begin_layout Subsection
34781 \begin_layout Standard
34782 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
34783 allows for searching of complex,
34784 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
34786 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
34787 The key-features are:
34790 \begin_layout Itemize
34791 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
34792 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
34793 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
34797 \begin_layout Itemize
34798 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
34799 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
34800 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
34801 a section heading will only be found within section headings
34804 \begin_layout Itemize
34805 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
34806 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
34807 outside of mathematics environments
34810 \begin_layout Itemize
34811 Search may be widened to a specific
34816 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34820 \begin_inset space ~
34823 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
34824 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
34831 \begin_layout Itemize
34832 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
34833 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
34834 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34838 \begin_inset space ~
34841 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
34844 \begin_layout Subsection
34848 \begin_layout Standard
34849 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
34851 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
34864 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
34867 ) or the toolbar button
34870 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
34876 Advanced Find and Replace
34881 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34885 \begin_layout Standard
34891 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
34895 \begin_inset space ~
34900 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
34903 arg "paragraph-break"
34907 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
34908 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
34912 arg "paragraph-break"
34915 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
34919 searches backwards.
34922 \begin_layout Standard
34926 \begin_inset space ~
34931 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
34940 \begin_inset space ~
34945 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
34948 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34949 Searching for mathematics
34952 \begin_layout Standard
34953 Mathematical formulas, such as
34954 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
34957 or something more complex like
34958 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
34961 , may be searched for by typing them in the
34966 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
34967 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
34968 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
34969 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
34975 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34979 \begin_layout Standard
34980 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
34981 This is done by switching to the
34985 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
34990 This way, entering in the
34997 \begin_layout Itemize
34998 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
34999 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
35002 \begin_layout Itemize
35003 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
35004 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
35007 \begin_layout Itemize
35008 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
35009 of it only within section headings.
35010 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
35011 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
35015 \begin_layout Itemize
35016 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
35017 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
35020 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35024 \begin_layout Standard
35025 The entries made in the
35029 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
35032 \begin_inset space ~
35038 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
35042 button or alternatively press
35045 arg "paragraph-break"
35052 while the cursor is in the
35055 \begin_inset space ~
35063 \begin_layout Standard
35064 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
35066 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
35070 \begin_layout Itemize
35071 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
35072 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
35073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35080 with its typewriter version
35081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35095 \begin_layout Itemize
35096 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
35098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35102 \begin_inset Formula $R$
35106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35114 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
35118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35121 (you may want to enable the
35124 \begin_inset space ~
35132 \begin_inset space ~
35137 options and disable the
35145 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
35146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35153 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
35154 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
35158 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
35161 , or occurrences of
35162 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
35166 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
35172 \begin_layout Subsection
35176 \begin_layout Standard
35177 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
35181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35182 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
35184 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35186 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
35195 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
35201 This is done with the context menu
35203 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35204 Insert Regular Expression
35206 while the cursor is in the
35211 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
35212 expression matching rules
35216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35217 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
35220 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35224 \begin_inset space ~
35227 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
35228 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
35234 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
35235 same text in the document.
35236 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
35237 Examples of using such a feature may be:
35240 \begin_layout Enumerate
35241 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
35246 editor the fraction
35247 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
35251 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35254 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
35255 fractions with the given denominator.
35258 \begin_layout Enumerate
35259 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
35271 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35276 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
35277 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
35278 Also, by inserting a
35279 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35282 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
35283 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
35286 \begin_layout Standard
35287 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
35288 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
35289 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35292 , and referring back to them through
35293 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35297 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
35301 For example, try searching with the regexp
35302 \begin_inset Newline newline
35305 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
35308 \begin_inset Newline newline
35311 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
35314 \begin_layout Standard
35315 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
35318 \begin_layout Standard
35319 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35327 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
35328 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
35329 sub-expressions is absolute.
35331 \begin_inset space ~
35335 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35338 always refers to the first occurrence of
35339 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35342 in all entered regexps.
35350 \begin_layout Section
35352 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35354 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35359 \begin_inset Index idx
35362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35371 \begin_layout Standard
35373 has a built-in spell checker.
35376 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35383 key or the toolbar button
35386 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35389 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35390 beginning of the currently selected text.
35391 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35392 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35393 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35394 scrolled so that it is visible.
35395 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35396 n, if any could be found.
35397 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35401 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35402 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35405 \begin_layout Standard
35406 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35409 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35413 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35414 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35416 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35417 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35420 \begin_inset space ~
35428 arg "dialog-show character"
35431 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35433 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35436 \begin_layout Standard
35437 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35438 can be downloaded from here:
35439 \begin_inset Newline newline
35443 \begin_inset Flex URL
35446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35448 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35454 \begin_inset Newline newline
35458 \begin_inset space ~
35461 files for each language.
35462 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35463 \begin_inset space ~
35466 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35467 's installation subfolder
35475 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35477 \begin_inset Newline newline
35480 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35481 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35482 but in most cases these are
35498 is the language code.
35501 \begin_layout Subsection
35505 \begin_layout Standard
35508 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35509 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35511 \begin_inset space ~
35514 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35517 you can set the following things:
35520 \begin_layout Description
35522 \begin_inset space ~
35525 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
35526 should use for spell checking.
35527 Depending on your platform,
35541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35542 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
35543 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
35558 \begin_inset space ~
35561 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
35564 \begin_layout Description
35566 \begin_inset space ~
35569 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
35570 will always use the given language
35571 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
35574 \begin_layout Description
35576 \begin_inset space ~
35579 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
35581 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35585 \begin_inset space \space{}
35589 This should normally not be needed.
35592 \begin_layout Description
35594 \begin_inset space ~
35598 \begin_inset space ~
35601 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35613 \begin_layout Description
35615 \begin_inset space ~
35618 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35619 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35620 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35621 appear in a context menu.
35622 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35626 \begin_layout Description
35628 \begin_inset space ~
35632 \begin_inset space ~
35636 \begin_inset space ~
35639 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35643 \begin_layout Section
35645 \begin_inset Index idx
35648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35655 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35657 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35664 \begin_layout Standard
35666 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35667 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35677 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35679 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35688 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35690 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35691 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35692 which are available for many languages.
35695 \begin_layout Standard
35696 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35697 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
35701 \begin_layout Subsection
35702 Setting up the thesaurus
35705 \begin_layout Standard
35714 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
35718 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
35723 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
35725 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35729 \begin_inset space ~
35737 For instance, the US English files are named:
35740 \begin_layout Itemize
35744 \begin_layout Itemize
35748 \begin_layout Standard
35757 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
35758 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
35761 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35762 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35763 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35765 \begin_inset space ~
35770 ) to the path where they are installed.
35774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35775 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
35776 ies, typical locations are
35782 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
35786 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
35790 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
35793 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
35799 LibreOffice-<Version>
35806 On the Mac, the default location is
35808 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
35809 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35810 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
35811 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
35812 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35813 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35821 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
35822 during the \SpecialChar LyX
35823 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
35827 \begin_layout Standard
35828 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
35829 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
35833 \begin_layout Itemize
35834 \begin_inset Flex URL
35837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35839 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
35847 \begin_layout Standard
35848 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
35849 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
35851 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35852 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35853 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35855 \begin_inset space ~
35860 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35862 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
35863 and point \SpecialChar LyX
35867 \begin_layout Standard
35868 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
35870 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35873 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
35879 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
35882 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
35883 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
35885 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35891 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35892 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35893 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35895 \begin_inset space ~
35900 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
35903 \begin_layout Subsection
35904 Using the thesaurus
35907 \begin_layout Standard
35908 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
35910 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35913 or the toolbar button
35916 arg "thesaurus-entry"
35919 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
35921 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
35923 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
35924 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
35925 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
35934 ), related terms (such as
35937 \begin_inset space ~
35946 ), compounds (such as
35949 \begin_inset space ~
35958 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
35967 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
35970 \begin_layout Standard
35971 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
35972 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
35976 \begin_layout Standard
35977 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
35978 the dictionary, such as the above
35982 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
35983 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35987 \begin_inset space \space{}
35990 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
35991 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
35992 For example, looking up the word form
35996 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
36001 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
36002 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36006 \begin_inset space \space{}
36017 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
36018 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
36019 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
36022 \begin_layout Section
36024 \begin_inset Index idx
36027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36034 \begin_inset Index idx
36037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36038 Document ! Change Tracking
36044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36046 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
36053 \begin_layout Standard
36054 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
36055 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
36056 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
36057 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
36059 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36061 \begin_inset space ~
36064 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36066 \begin_inset space ~
36074 \begin_layout Standard
36075 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
36089 The color depends on the author that made the change.
36090 You can change the color in
36092 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36093 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36095 \begin_inset space ~
36099 \begin_inset space ~
36104 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36110 \begin_inset Index idx
36113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36114 Color ! Change tracking
36119 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
36120 's status bar when the
36121 cursor is in changed text.
36122 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
36125 arg "changes-merge"
36131 \begin_layout Standard
36132 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
36134 \begin_inset Index idx
36137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36146 \begin_layout Standard
36147 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36153 \begin_layout Standard
36154 \begin_inset Graphics
36155 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
36163 \begin_layout Standard
36164 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36170 \begin_layout Standard
36171 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
36174 \begin_layout Standard
36175 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36181 \begin_layout Standard
36182 \begin_inset Tabular
36183 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
36184 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
36185 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36186 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36187 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36196 arg "changes-track"
36204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36210 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36212 \begin_inset space ~
36215 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36217 \begin_inset space ~
36226 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36235 arg "changes-output"
36243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36249 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36251 \begin_inset space ~
36254 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36256 \begin_inset space ~
36260 \begin_inset space ~
36264 \begin_inset space ~
36273 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36294 Jumps to the next change
36300 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36309 arg "change-accept"
36317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36323 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36325 \begin_inset space ~
36328 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36330 \begin_inset space ~
36339 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36348 arg "change-reject"
36356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36362 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36364 \begin_inset space ~
36367 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36369 \begin_inset space ~
36378 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36387 arg "changes-merge"
36395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36401 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36403 \begin_inset space ~
36406 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36408 \begin_inset space ~
36417 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36426 arg "all-changes-accept"
36434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36440 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36442 \begin_inset space ~
36445 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36447 \begin_inset space ~
36451 \begin_inset space ~
36460 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36469 arg "all-changes-reject"
36477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36483 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36485 \begin_inset space ~
36488 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36490 \begin_inset space ~
36494 \begin_inset space ~
36503 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36526 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36527 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
36529 \begin_inset space ~
36538 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36561 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
36563 \begin_inset space ~
36579 \begin_layout Standard
36580 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36586 \begin_layout Standard
36587 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36607 \begin_layout Standard
36608 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36609 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36610 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36611 the next change after the current cursor position.
36612 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36613 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36614 step to the next change.
36615 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36618 \begin_layout Standard
36619 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36620 to describe a change.
36623 \begin_layout Standard
36624 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36630 \begin_inset Index idx
36633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36635 -packages ! dvipost
36641 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36643 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36649 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36653 \begin_layout Section
36654 Comparison of Documents
36655 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36657 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36662 \begin_inset Index idx
36665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36666 Comparison of documents
36674 \begin_layout Standard
36675 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36678 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36682 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36683 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36685 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36687 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36691 \begin_inset space ~
36695 \begin_inset space ~
36699 \begin_inset space ~
36708 \begin_inset space ~
36712 \begin_inset space ~
36716 \begin_inset space ~
36720 \begin_inset space ~
36724 \begin_inset space ~
36728 \begin_inset space ~
36733 enables the change tracking option
36736 \begin_inset space ~
36740 \begin_inset space ~
36744 \begin_inset space ~
36749 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
36752 \begin_layout Section
36753 International Support
36754 \begin_inset Index idx
36757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36758 International support
36766 \begin_layout Standard
36767 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36768 with any language you want.
36769 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
36770 up \SpecialChar LyX
36772 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36774 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
36781 \begin_layout Standard
36782 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
36783 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
36784 \begin_inset space ~
36788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36790 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
36797 \begin_layout Subsection
36799 \begin_inset Index idx
36802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36809 \begin_inset Index idx
36812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36813 Document ! Settings
36819 \begin_inset Index idx
36822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36823 Document ! Language
36831 \begin_layout Standard
36834 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36835 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36838 dialog lets you set
36840 the language, the quote style and character encoding
36845 \begin_layout Standard
36850 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
36855 \begin_inset space ~
36860 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
36861 For details about the different encoding options see section
36862 \begin_inset space ~
36866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36868 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
36875 \begin_layout Subsection
36876 Keyboard mapping configuration
36877 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36879 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
36886 \begin_layout Standard
36887 If you have for example a U.
36888 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36891 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
36892 can use an alternate keymap.
36893 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
36898 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36899 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36900 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
36903 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
36904 \begin_inset space ~
36908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36910 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
36915 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
36916 which one you want to use.
36919 \begin_layout Standard
36920 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
36921 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
36922 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
36923 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36926 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
36927 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
36928 one to support the characters you want.
36929 This and many other customizations are explained in the
36936 \begin_layout Chapter
36939 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36941 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
36948 \begin_layout Standard
36949 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
36950 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
36951 topic inside the user's guide.
36954 \begin_layout Section
36956 \begin_inset Index idx
36959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36968 \begin_layout Standard
36973 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
36976 \begin_layout Subsection
36980 \begin_layout Standard
36981 Creates a new document.
36984 \begin_layout Subsection
36988 \begin_layout Standard
36989 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
36990 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
36991 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
36994 \begin_layout Subsection
36998 \begin_layout Standard
37002 \begin_layout Subsection
37006 \begin_layout Standard
37007 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
37008 Click there on a file to open it.
37011 \begin_layout Subsection
37015 \begin_layout Standard
37016 Closes the current document.
37019 \begin_layout Subsection
37023 \begin_layout Standard
37024 Closes all opened documents.
37027 \begin_layout Subsection
37031 \begin_layout Standard
37032 Saves the actual document.
37035 \begin_layout Subsection
37039 \begin_layout Standard
37040 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
37043 \begin_layout Subsection
37047 \begin_layout Standard
37048 Saves all opened documents.
37051 \begin_layout Subsection
37055 \begin_layout Standard
37056 Reloads the actual document from disk.
37059 \begin_layout Subsection
37063 \begin_layout Standard
37064 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
37065 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
37066 It is described in the section
37068 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
37073 Additional Features
37078 \begin_layout Subsection
37082 \begin_layout Standard
37083 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
37084 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
37086 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
37087 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
37091 \begin_layout Standard
37092 When using the menu entry
37095 \begin_inset space ~
37100 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
37104 \begin_inset space ~
37108 \begin_inset space ~
37112 \begin_inset space ~
37117 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
37118 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
37121 \begin_layout Subsection
37123 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37125 name "subsec:Export"
37132 \begin_layout Standard
37133 You can export your document to various file formats.
37134 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
37136 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
37137 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
37138 during its configuration.
37141 \begin_layout Standard
37142 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
37144 \begin_inset space ~
37148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37150 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
37157 \begin_layout Description
37163 \begin_inset space ~
37166 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
37168 \begin_inset space ~
37171 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
37172 \begin_inset Newline newline
37175 Since \SpecialChar LyX
37176 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
37180 \begin_layout Description
37181 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
37187 \begin_layout Description
37189 \begin_inset space ~
37192 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
37198 \begin_layout Description
37199 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
37200 's native DVI-format.
37201 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
37202 files paths or file names in your document.
37204 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
37211 \begin_layout Description
37212 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
37213 in files paths or file names
37216 \begin_layout Description
37218 \begin_inset space ~
37225 ) DVI-format using the program
37227 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37230 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
37234 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37242 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
37250 \begin_layout Description
37252 \begin_inset space ~
37255 (cropped) the same as
37259 but with cropped page margins.
37262 \begin_layout Description
37264 \begin_inset space ~
37267 Dot text file with code in the programming language
37271 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
37276 \begin_layout Description
37280 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37288 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
37296 \begin_layout Description
37298 \begin_inset space ~
37302 \begin_inset space ~
37305 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
37309 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37317 \begin_layout Description
37321 \begin_inset space ~
37330 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37331 source that is compilable with the program
37333 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37337 \begin_layout Description
37341 \begin_inset space ~
37346 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37347 source, additionally all images used in the document
37348 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37352 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37355 \begin_layout Description
37359 \begin_inset space ~
37364 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37365 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37366 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37374 \begin_layout Description
37378 \begin_inset space ~
37387 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37388 source that is compilable with the program
37394 \begin_layout Description
37396 \begin_inset space ~
37400 \begin_inset space ~
37407 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37408 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37414 \begin_layout Description
37416 \begin_inset space ~
37419 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37420 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37422 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37426 \begin_inset space \space{}
37431 \begin_inset space ~
37435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37450 represent the version number)
37453 \begin_layout Description
37455 \begin_inset space ~
37459 \begin_inset space ~
37462 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37463 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37464 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37468 \begin_layout Description
37469 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37470 's internal XHTML engine
37473 \begin_layout Description
37475 \begin_inset space ~
37479 \begin_inset space ~
37483 \begin_inset space ~
37487 \begin_inset space ~
37490 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37495 For the conversion the program
37504 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37507 \begin_layout Description
37508 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37513 \begin_layout Description
37515 \begin_inset space ~
37518 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37520 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
37523 For the conversion the program
37532 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37535 \begin_layout Description
37537 \begin_inset space ~
37540 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
37541 For the conversion the program
37550 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37553 \begin_layout Description
37555 \begin_inset space ~
37558 (cropped) the same as
37561 \begin_inset space ~
37566 but with cropped page margins
37569 \begin_layout Description
37573 \begin_inset space ~
37578 PDF-format using the program
37582 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37585 \begin_layout Description
37589 \begin_inset space ~
37593 \begin_inset space ~
37601 \begin_inset space ~
37606 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37607 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37611 \begin_inset space \space{}
37614 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37618 \begin_layout Description
37622 \begin_inset space ~
37627 PDF-format using the program
37629 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37632 , produces PDF-files directly
37635 \begin_layout Description
37639 \begin_inset space ~
37644 PDF-format using the program
37648 , produces PDF-files directly
37651 \begin_layout Description
37655 \begin_inset space ~
37660 PDF-format using the program
37664 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37667 \begin_layout Description
37671 \begin_inset space ~
37676 PDF-format using the program
37681 , produces PDF-files directly
37684 \begin_layout Description
37688 \begin_inset space ~
37696 \begin_layout Description
37700 \begin_inset space ~
37704 \begin_inset space ~
37709 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
37710 and then exported as text using the program
37715 \begin_layout Description
37720 PostScript format using the program
37728 options see section
37729 \begin_inset space ~
37733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37735 reference "subsec:General-output"
37742 \begin_layout Description
37743 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37744 source and also code in the statistical programming
37758 it is possible to use
37762 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37766 \begin_layout Standard
37767 If one of the menu entries
37774 \begin_inset space ~
37783 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37785 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37787 \begin_inset space ~
37791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37793 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37798 \begin_inset Index idx
37801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37802 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37811 \begin_layout Subsection
37815 \begin_layout Standard
37816 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
37817 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
37820 \begin_inset space ~
37824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37826 reference "sec:Paths"
37831 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
37840 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
37841 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
37842 's preferences as described in section
37843 \begin_inset space ~
37847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37849 reference "subsec:Converters"
37856 \begin_layout Subsection
37857 New and Close Window
37860 \begin_layout Standard
37861 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
37865 \begin_layout Subsection
37869 \begin_layout Standard
37870 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
37873 \begin_layout Section
37875 \begin_inset Index idx
37878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37887 \begin_layout Subsection
37891 \begin_layout Standard
37892 Described in section
37893 \begin_inset space ~
37897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37899 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
37906 \begin_layout Subsection
37907 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
37910 \begin_layout Standard
37911 Described in section
37912 \begin_inset space ~
37916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37918 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37925 \begin_layout Subsection
37929 \begin_layout Standard
37930 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
37931 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
37934 \begin_layout Subsection
37938 \begin_layout Standard
37939 Selects the whole document.
37942 \begin_layout Subsection
37943 Find & Replace (Quick)
37946 \begin_layout Standard
37947 Described in section
37948 \begin_inset space ~
37952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37954 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37961 \begin_layout Subsection
37962 Find & Replace (Advanced)
37965 \begin_layout Standard
37966 Described in section
37967 \begin_inset space ~
37971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37973 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37980 \begin_layout Subsection
37981 Move Paragraph Up/Down
37984 \begin_layout Standard
37985 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
37989 \begin_layout Subsection
37993 \begin_layout Standard
37994 Described in section
37995 \begin_inset space ~
37999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38001 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
38008 \begin_layout Subsection
38010 \begin_inset Index idx
38013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38014 Paragraph ! Settings
38022 \begin_layout Standard
38023 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
38024 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
38028 \begin_layout Standard
38029 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
38030 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
38036 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38037 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38039 \begin_inset space ~
38047 \begin_layout Subsection
38048 Table and Rows & Columns
38051 \begin_layout Standard
38052 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
38053 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
38054 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
38057 \begin_layout Subsection
38061 \begin_layout Standard
38062 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
38063 It will dissolve this inset.
38064 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
38068 \begin_layout Subsection
38072 \begin_layout Standard
38073 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
38074 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
38077 \begin_layout Subsection
38078 Increase/Decrease List Depth
38081 \begin_layout Standard
38082 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
38084 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
38085 \begin_inset space ~
38089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38091 reference "sec:Nesting"
38096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38098 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
38105 \begin_layout Subsection
38108 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
38111 \begin_layout Standard
38112 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
38113 nts of the same type.
38115 \begin_inset space ~
38119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38121 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
38125 for an explanation.
38128 \begin_layout Section
38130 \begin_inset Index idx
38133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38142 \begin_layout Standard
38143 At the bottom of the
38147 menu the opened documents are listed.
38150 \begin_layout Subsection
38151 Open/Close all Insets
38154 \begin_layout Standard
38155 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
38158 \begin_layout Subsection
38159 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
38162 \begin_layout Standard
38163 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
38166 \begin_layout Standard
38167 Math macros are described in the
38174 \begin_layout Subsection
38178 \begin_layout Standard
38179 Shows the outline window as described in sections
38180 \begin_inset space ~
38184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38186 reference "sec:Navigating"
38191 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38193 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
38200 \begin_layout Subsection
38204 \begin_layout Standard
38205 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
38207 \begin_inset space ~
38211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38213 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
38220 \begin_layout Subsection
38224 \begin_layout Standard
38225 Opens a window showing console messages.
38226 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
38228 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38231 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
38232 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
38233 is processing the document.
38236 \begin_layout Subsection
38238 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38240 name "subsec:Toolbars"
38245 \begin_inset Index idx
38248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38257 \begin_layout Standard
38258 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
38259 All toolbars and the
38262 \begin_inset space ~
38267 can be turned on and off.
38272 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
38284 \begin_inset space ~
38296 \begin_inset space ~
38301 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
38305 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
38312 \begin_layout Standard
38317 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
38321 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38322 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38323 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
38324 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
38325 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38328 \begin_layout Standard
38330 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38331 \begin_inset space ~
38335 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38337 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38344 \begin_layout Subsection
38348 \begin_layout Standard
38352 \begin_inset space ~
38356 \begin_inset space ~
38360 \begin_inset space ~
38364 \begin_inset space ~
38368 \begin_inset space ~
38372 \begin_inset space ~
38377 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38378 's main window vertically while
38381 \begin_inset space ~
38385 \begin_inset space ~
38389 \begin_inset space ~
38393 \begin_inset space ~
38397 \begin_inset space ~
38401 \begin_inset space ~
38406 will split it horizontally.
38407 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38408 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38409 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38410 three or more documents at the same time.
38411 To close a split view, use the menu
38414 \begin_inset space ~
38418 \begin_inset space ~
38426 \begin_layout Subsection
38430 \begin_layout Standard
38431 Closes a split view.
38434 \begin_layout Subsection
38438 \begin_layout Standard
38439 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38440 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38441 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38442 's main window fullscreen.
38443 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38444 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38447 \begin_layout Section
38449 \begin_inset Index idx
38452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38461 \begin_layout Subsection
38465 \begin_layout Standard
38466 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38467 \begin_inset space ~
38471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38473 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38484 \begin_layout Subsection
38486 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38488 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38495 \begin_layout Standard
38496 Here you can insert the following characters:
38499 \begin_layout Description
38504 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38507 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38508 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38509 -packages you have installed.
38510 You can get a complete display by checking
38513 \begin_inset space ~
38519 \begin_inset Newline newline
38523 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38531 Not all characters will be visible in the
38535 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38536 dialog (see section
38537 \begin_inset space ~
38541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38543 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
38547 ) can display every character.
38555 \begin_layout Description
38556 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
38560 \begin_layout Description
38562 \begin_inset space ~
38566 \begin_inset space ~
38569 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
38570 \begin_inset space ~
38574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38576 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
38583 \begin_layout Description
38585 \begin_inset space ~
38588 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38591 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38592 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38598 \begin_layout Description
38600 \begin_inset space ~
38603 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38606 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38607 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38613 \begin_layout Description
38615 \begin_inset space ~
38618 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38622 \begin_layout Description
38624 \begin_inset space ~
38627 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38631 \begin_layout Description
38633 \begin_inset space ~
38636 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
38642 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38648 \begin_layout Description
38650 \begin_inset space ~
38653 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
38657 \begin_layout Description
38659 \begin_inset space ~
38663 \begin_inset Index idx
38666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38673 \begin_inset Index idx
38676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38677 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38682 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
38683 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
38685 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38691 \begin_inset Index idx
38694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38702 \begin_inset Newline newline
38705 More information about this feature can be found in the
38711 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38717 \begin_layout Description
38718 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
38720 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
38721 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
38725 \begin_layout Subsection
38729 \begin_layout Standard
38730 Opens a submenu with the following options:
38733 \begin_layout Description
38734 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
38735 \begin_inset script superscript
38737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38746 \begin_layout Description
38747 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
38748 \begin_inset script subscript
38750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38759 \begin_layout Description
38761 \begin_inset space ~
38764 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
38765 \begin_inset space ~
38769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38771 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
38778 \begin_layout Description
38780 \begin_inset space ~
38783 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
38784 \begin_inset space ~
38788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38790 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
38797 \begin_layout Description
38799 \begin_inset space ~
38802 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
38803 \begin_inset space ~
38807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38809 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
38816 \begin_layout Description
38818 \begin_inset space ~
38821 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
38823 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38827 \begin_inset space \space{}
38830 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
38831 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
38837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38840 To insert a fraction use the command
38845 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38849 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
38855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38858 The visible space is hereby the character before the
38865 \begin_layout Description
38867 \begin_inset space ~
38870 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
38871 \begin_inset space ~
38875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38877 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
38884 \begin_layout Description
38886 \begin_inset space ~
38889 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
38890 \begin_inset space ~
38894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38896 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
38903 \begin_layout Description
38905 \begin_inset space ~
38908 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
38909 \begin_inset space ~
38913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38915 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
38922 \begin_layout Description
38923 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
38924 \begin_inset space ~
38928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38930 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
38937 \begin_layout Description
38939 \begin_inset space ~
38942 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
38943 \begin_inset space ~
38947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38949 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
38956 \begin_layout Description
38958 \begin_inset space ~
38961 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
38962 \begin_inset space ~
38966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38968 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
38975 \begin_layout Description
38977 \begin_inset space ~
38981 \begin_inset space ~
38984 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
38985 \begin_inset space ~
38989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38991 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38998 \begin_layout Description
39000 \begin_inset space ~
39003 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
39004 as described in section
39005 \begin_inset space ~
39009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39011 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
39018 \begin_layout Description
39020 \begin_inset space ~
39023 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
39024 \begin_inset space ~
39028 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39030 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39037 \begin_layout Description
39039 \begin_inset space ~
39042 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
39043 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
39045 \begin_inset space ~
39049 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39051 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39058 \begin_layout Description
39060 \begin_inset space ~
39063 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
39064 \begin_inset space ~
39068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39070 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39077 \begin_layout Description
39079 \begin_inset space ~
39083 \begin_inset space ~
39086 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
39087 \begin_inset space ~
39091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39093 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39100 \begin_layout Subsection
39104 \begin_layout Standard
39105 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
39109 \begin_inset space ~
39130 are described in section
39131 \begin_inset space ~
39135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39137 reference "sec:toc"
39146 is described in section
39147 \begin_inset space ~
39151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39153 reference "sec:Index"
39161 is described in section
39162 \begin_inset space ~
39166 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39168 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39174 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39177 is described in section
39178 \begin_inset space ~
39182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39184 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
39191 \begin_layout Subsection
39195 \begin_layout Standard
39196 To insert floats, as described in section
39197 \begin_inset space ~
39201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39203 reference "sec:Floats"
39207 and in detail the chapter
39214 \begin_inset space ~
39222 \begin_layout Subsection
39226 \begin_layout Standard
39227 To insert notes, described in section
39228 \begin_inset space ~
39232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39234 reference "sec:Notes"
39241 \begin_layout Subsection
39245 \begin_layout Standard
39246 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
39248 Branches are described in section
39249 \begin_inset space ~
39253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39255 reference "sec:Branches"
39262 \begin_layout Subsection
39266 \begin_layout Standard
39267 Inserts document class-specific insets.
39268 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
39270 An example is the document class
39271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39278 with three custom insets.
39281 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39285 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
39291 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39294 \begin_layout Subsection
39296 \begin_inset Index idx
39299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39308 \begin_layout Standard
39309 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
39311 For more information see chapter
39313 External Document Parts
39316 \begin_inset space ~
39322 \begin_layout Subsection
39324 \begin_inset Index idx
39327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39336 \begin_layout Standard
39337 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39338 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39345 \begin_inset space ~
39353 \begin_layout Subsection
39357 \begin_layout Standard
39362 dialog as described in section
39363 \begin_inset space ~
39367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39369 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39376 \begin_layout Subsection
39380 \begin_layout Standard
39385 as described in section
39386 \begin_inset space ~
39390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39392 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39399 \begin_layout Subsection
39403 \begin_layout Standard
39408 as described in section
39409 \begin_inset space ~
39413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39415 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39422 \begin_layout Subsection
39424 \begin_inset Index idx
39427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39434 \begin_inset Index idx
39437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39438 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39446 \begin_layout Standard
39447 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39448 Floats are described in section
39449 \begin_inset space ~
39453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39455 reference "sec:Floats"
39459 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39461 Multi-page Captions
39466 \begin_inset space ~
39474 \begin_layout Subsection
39478 \begin_layout Standard
39479 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39480 \begin_inset space ~
39484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39486 reference "sec:Index"
39493 \begin_layout Subsection
39497 \begin_layout Standard
39498 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39499 \begin_inset space ~
39503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39505 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39512 \begin_layout Subsection
39516 \begin_layout Standard
39517 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
39518 Tables are described in section
39519 \begin_inset space ~
39523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39525 reference "sec:Tables"
39529 and in detail in the chapter
39536 \begin_inset space ~
39544 \begin_layout Subsection
39548 \begin_layout Standard
39554 Graphics are described in section
39555 \begin_inset space ~
39559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39561 reference "sec:Graphics"
39568 \begin_layout Subsection
39572 \begin_layout Standard
39573 Inserts a URL as described in section
39574 \begin_inset space ~
39578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39580 reference "subsec:URLs"
39587 \begin_layout Subsection
39591 \begin_layout Standard
39592 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39593 \begin_inset space ~
39597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39599 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
39606 \begin_layout Subsection
39610 \begin_layout Standard
39611 Inserts a footnote as described in section
39612 \begin_inset space ~
39616 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39618 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39625 \begin_layout Subsection
39629 \begin_layout Standard
39630 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
39631 \begin_inset space ~
39635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39637 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39644 \begin_layout Subsection
39648 \begin_layout Standard
39649 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
39650 title or caption of a float.
39651 Inserts a short title as described in section
39652 \begin_inset space ~
39656 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39658 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
39665 \begin_layout Subsection
39670 \begin_layout Standard
39671 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
39672 Code box as described in section
39673 \begin_inset space ~
39677 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39679 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39686 \begin_layout Subsection
39688 \begin_inset Index idx
39691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39700 \begin_layout Standard
39701 Inserts a program listings box.
39702 Program listings are explained in the chapter
39704 Program Code Listings
39709 \begin_inset space ~
39717 \begin_layout Subsection
39721 \begin_layout Standard
39722 Inserts the actual date.
39723 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
39727 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
39735 \begin_inset space ~
39743 \begin_layout Subsection
39747 \begin_layout Standard
39748 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
39749 \begin_inset space ~
39753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39755 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39762 \begin_layout Section
39764 \begin_inset Index idx
39767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39776 \begin_layout Standard
39777 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
39778 \begin_inset space ~
39781 of the current document.
39782 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
39785 \begin_layout Subsection
39789 \begin_layout Standard
39790 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
39791 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
39792 to jump, for example, between section
39793 \begin_inset space ~
39797 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
39798 \begin_inset space ~
39801 2.5 and use the submenu
39804 \begin_inset space ~
39808 \begin_inset space ~
39815 \begin_inset space ~
39821 \begin_inset space ~
39825 \begin_inset space ~
39831 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
39835 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
39841 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
39844 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
39847 \begin_layout Standard
39848 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
39852 \begin_inset space ~
39857 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
39860 \begin_inset space ~
39865 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
39868 \begin_layout Subsection
39869 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
39872 \begin_layout Standard
39873 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
39877 \begin_layout Subsection
39881 \begin_layout Standard
39882 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
39883 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
39884 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
39888 \begin_inset space ~
39892 \begin_inset space ~
39900 \begin_layout Subsection
39904 \begin_layout Standard
39905 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
39908 The \SpecialChar LyX
39909 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
39911 \begin_inset space ~
39919 \begin_inset space ~
39924 manual for a detailed description.
39927 \begin_layout Section
39929 \begin_inset Index idx
39932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39941 \begin_layout Subsection
39945 \begin_layout Standard
39946 Change Tracking is described in section
39947 \begin_inset space ~
39951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39953 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39960 \begin_layout Subsection
39968 \begin_layout Standard
39969 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
39970 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
39971 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39973 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
39974 to the clipboard or update the view.
39975 \begin_inset Newline newline
39978 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39982 \begin_layout Standard
39985 Open Containing Directory
39987 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
39988 's temporary folder for the document.
39989 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
39990 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
39991 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
39992 For example some journals require to send the
39996 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40000 \begin_layout Subsection
40001 Start Appendix Here
40004 \begin_layout Standard
40005 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
40006 as described in section
40007 \begin_inset space ~
40011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40013 reference "sec:Appendices"
40020 \begin_layout Subsection
40022 \begin_inset space ~
40028 \begin_layout Standard
40029 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
40030 default output format for the document (menu
40032 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40033 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40034 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40036 \begin_inset space ~
40040 \begin_inset space ~
40046 \begin_inset space ~
40050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40052 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40056 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
40059 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40060 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40062 \begin_inset space ~
40065 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40067 \begin_inset space ~
40070 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40072 \begin_inset space ~
40076 \begin_inset space ~
40082 \begin_inset space ~
40086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40088 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40092 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
40093 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40095 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40096 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40098 \begin_inset space ~
40101 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40103 \begin_inset space ~
40106 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40110 \begin_inset space ~
40114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40116 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40121 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40122 when it is first configured.
40123 The default output format is
40126 \begin_inset space ~
40134 \begin_layout Subsection
40135 View (Other Formats)
40138 \begin_layout Standard
40139 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
40140 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
40141 actual document with an external program.
40142 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
40143 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40144 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
40146 All possible formats are listed in section
40147 \begin_inset space ~
40151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40153 reference "subsec:Export"
40158 You should at least see the menu entry
40163 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40165 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40167 \begin_inset space ~
40171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40173 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40178 \begin_inset Index idx
40181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40182 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40191 \begin_layout Standard
40192 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
40193 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40195 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40196 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40198 \begin_inset space ~
40201 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40203 \begin_inset space ~
40206 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40210 \begin_inset space ~
40214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40216 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40221 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40222 when it is first configured.
40225 \begin_layout Subsection
40227 \begin_inset space ~
40233 \begin_layout Standard
40234 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
40235 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
40238 \begin_layout Subsection
40239 Update (Other Formats)
40242 \begin_layout Standard
40243 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
40244 your document without opening a new viewer window.
40247 \begin_layout Subsection
40248 View Master Document
40251 \begin_layout Standard
40252 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40268 \begin_inset space ~
40273 manual for more information on this topic).
40274 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
40275 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
40279 \begin_inset space ~
40283 \begin_inset space ~
40288 generates the output of the whole book, while
40292 will just output the chapter alone.
40295 \begin_layout Standard
40296 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40297 in the document settings (menu
40299 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40300 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40301 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40303 \begin_inset space ~
40307 \begin_inset space ~
40313 \begin_inset space ~
40317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40319 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40323 ) or in the preferences (menu
40325 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40326 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40328 \begin_inset space ~
40331 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40333 \begin_inset space ~
40336 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40338 \begin_inset space ~
40342 \begin_inset space ~
40348 \begin_inset space ~
40352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40354 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40361 \begin_layout Subsection
40362 Update Master Document
40365 \begin_layout Standard
40366 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40382 \begin_inset space ~
40387 manual for more information on this topic).
40388 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40389 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40392 \begin_layout Standard
40393 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40394 in the document settings (menu
40396 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40397 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40398 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40400 \begin_inset space ~
40404 \begin_inset space ~
40410 \begin_inset space ~
40414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40416 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40420 ) or in the preferences (menu
40422 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40423 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40425 \begin_inset space ~
40428 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40430 \begin_inset space ~
40433 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40435 \begin_inset space ~
40439 \begin_inset space ~
40445 \begin_inset space ~
40449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40451 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40458 \begin_layout Subsection
40460 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40462 name "subsec:Compressed"
40469 \begin_layout Standard
40470 Un/compresses the current document.
40471 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
40472 compression (see the
40474 Additional Features
40476 manual for details).
40479 \begin_layout Subsection
40483 \begin_layout Standard
40484 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
40487 \begin_layout Subsection
40491 \begin_layout Standard
40492 The document settings are described in appendix
40493 \begin_inset space ~
40497 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40499 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40506 \begin_layout Section
40508 \begin_inset Index idx
40511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40520 \begin_layout Subsection
40524 \begin_layout Standard
40525 Spell checking is explained in section
40526 \begin_inset space ~
40530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40532 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40539 \begin_layout Subsection
40543 \begin_layout Standard
40544 The thesaurus is described in section
40545 \begin_inset space ~
40549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40551 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40558 \begin_layout Subsection
40560 \begin_inset Index idx
40563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40570 \begin_inset Index idx
40573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40582 \begin_layout Standard
40583 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
40584 the highlighted document part.
40587 \begin_layout Subsection
40593 \begin_inset Index idx
40596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40597 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40606 \begin_layout Standard
40607 Generates with the help of the program
40609 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40612 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
40613 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
40614 This feature is not available on Windows.
40617 \begin_layout Subsection
40623 \begin_inset Index idx
40626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40636 \begin_layout Standard
40637 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40642 \begin_inset space ~
40647 to see the full filename paths.
40650 \begin_layout Subsection
40652 \begin_inset Index idx
40655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40664 \begin_layout Standard
40665 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
40666 files as described in section
40667 \begin_inset space ~
40671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40673 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40680 \begin_layout Subsection
40682 \begin_inset Index idx
40685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40698 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40716 \begin_inset Index idx
40719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40720 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40729 \begin_layout Standard
40730 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
40731 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
40732 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40733 -packages and programs it needs; see
40735 \begin_inset space ~
40739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40741 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40748 \begin_layout Subsection
40752 \begin_layout Standard
40757 dialog as described in detail in appendix
40758 \begin_inset space ~
40762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40764 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40771 \begin_layout Section
40773 \begin_inset Index idx
40776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40785 \begin_layout Standard
40786 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
40787 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
40789 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
40793 \begin_layout Standard
40797 \begin_inset space ~
40802 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
40803 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40804 packages and classes found
40805 by \SpecialChar LyX
40807 \begin_inset space ~
40811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40813 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
40820 \begin_layout Standard
40824 \begin_inset space ~
40829 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
40834 \begin_layout Section
40836 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40838 name "sec:Toolbars"
40845 \begin_layout Standard
40846 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
40847 \begin_inset space ~
40851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40853 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
40860 \begin_layout Standard
40861 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
40862 This is described in the
40864 Additional Features
40869 \begin_layout Subsection
40871 \begin_inset Index idx
40874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40883 \begin_layout Standard
40884 \begin_inset Graphics
40885 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
40893 \begin_layout Standard
40894 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40900 \begin_layout Standard
40901 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40918 \begin_inset Note Note
40921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40922 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
40927 manual for more information.
40935 \begin_layout Standard
40936 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40942 \begin_layout Standard
40943 \begin_inset Tabular
40944 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
40945 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40946 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40947 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40953 \begin_inset Graphics
40954 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
40964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40968 pull-down box for the environments
40981 \begin_layout Standard
40982 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
40988 \begin_layout Standard
40990 \begin_inset Tabular
40991 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
40992 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40993 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40994 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40995 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41018 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41025 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41048 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41055 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41078 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41085 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41094 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
41102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41108 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41115 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41124 arg "spelling-continuously"
41132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41136 Spellcheck continuously
41142 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41165 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41172 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41195 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41202 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41225 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41232 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41255 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41262 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41285 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41292 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41301 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41315 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41317 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41321 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41325 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41334 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41341 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41355 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41357 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41365 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41374 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41383 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41397 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41398 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41405 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41426 Emphasize text, function of the
41428 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41430 \begin_inset space ~
41433 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41442 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41463 Set text to noun style, function of the
41465 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41467 \begin_inset space ~
41470 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41479 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41488 arg "textstyle-apply"
41496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41500 Format text using the current settings in the
41502 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41504 \begin_inset space ~
41507 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41516 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41539 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41540 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41542 \begin_inset space ~
41551 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41560 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41574 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41581 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41588 arg "tabular-insert"
41596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41602 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41609 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41618 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41630 Toggle outline window on/off,
41632 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41639 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41648 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41660 Toggle math toolbar on/off
41666 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41675 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
41683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41687 Toggle table toolbar on/off
41700 \begin_layout Subsection
41702 \begin_inset Index idx
41705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41714 \begin_layout Standard
41715 \begin_inset Graphics
41716 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
41724 \begin_layout Standard
41725 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41731 \begin_layout Standard
41732 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41736 \begin_layout Standard
41737 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41743 \begin_layout Standard
41744 \begin_inset Tabular
41745 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
41746 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41747 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41748 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41749 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41776 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41785 arg "layout Enumerate"
41793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41803 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41812 arg "layout Itemize"
41820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41830 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41857 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41866 arg "layout Description"
41874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41884 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41893 arg "depth-increment"
41901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41907 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41909 \begin_inset space ~
41913 \begin_inset space ~
41922 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41931 arg "depth-decrement"
41939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41945 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41947 \begin_inset space ~
41951 \begin_inset space ~
41960 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41969 arg "float-insert figure"
41977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41983 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41984 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41991 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42000 arg "float-insert table"
42008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42014 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42015 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
42022 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42045 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42052 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42061 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
42069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42075 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42082 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42091 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
42099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42105 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42112 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42135 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42137 \begin_inset space ~
42146 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42155 arg "nomencl-insert"
42163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42169 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42171 \begin_inset space ~
42180 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42189 arg "footnote-insert"
42197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42203 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42210 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42219 arg "marginalnote-insert"
42227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42233 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42235 \begin_inset space ~
42244 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42267 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42268 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
42270 \begin_inset space ~
42279 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42288 arg "box-insert Frameless"
42296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42302 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42309 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42332 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42339 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42362 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42364 \begin_inset space ~
42373 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42382 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42396 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42397 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42404 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42413 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42427 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42428 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42430 \begin_inset space ~
42439 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42448 arg "dialog-show character"
42456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42462 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42464 \begin_inset space ~
42467 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42474 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42483 arg "layout-paragraph"
42491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42497 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42499 \begin_inset space ~
42508 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42517 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42531 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42545 \begin_layout Subsection
42546 View/Update Toolbar
42547 \begin_inset Index idx
42550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42551 Toolbar ! View / Update
42559 \begin_layout Standard
42560 \begin_inset Graphics
42561 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42568 \begin_layout Standard
42569 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42575 \begin_layout Standard
42576 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42580 \begin_layout Standard
42581 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42587 \begin_layout Standard
42588 \begin_inset Tabular
42589 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42590 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42591 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42592 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42593 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42616 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42623 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42632 arg "buffer-update"
42640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42646 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42653 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42662 arg "master-buffer-view"
42670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42676 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42678 \begin_inset space ~
42687 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42696 arg "master-buffer-update"
42704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42710 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42712 \begin_inset space ~
42716 \begin_inset space ~
42725 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42734 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
42742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42748 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42749 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42750 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42751 Synchronize with Output
42757 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42780 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42781 View (Other Formats)
42787 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42794 arg "update-others"
42802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42808 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42809 Update (Other Formats)
42822 \begin_layout Standard
42823 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
42827 \begin_layout Subsection
42831 \begin_layout Standard
42832 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
42833 \begin_inset space ~
42837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42839 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42843 , the table toolbar
42844 \begin_inset Index idx
42847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42856 \begin_inset space ~
42861 manual and the math macro toolbar
42862 \begin_inset Index idx
42865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42878 \begin_layout Chapter
42879 The Document Settings
42880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42882 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42887 \begin_inset Index idx
42890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42891 Document ! Settings
42899 \begin_layout Standard
42903 \begin_inset space ~
42908 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
42909 is called with the menu
42911 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42915 You can save your document settings as default with the
42917 Save as Document Defaults
42919 button in any dialog.
42920 This will create a template named
42924 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
42925 when you create a new document without
42929 \begin_layout Standard
42934 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
42935 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
42938 \begin_layout Standard
42939 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
42940 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
42941 to find the one you are looking for.
42942 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
42943 the submenus of the dialog.
42945 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42949 \begin_inset space \space{}
42953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42960 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
42961 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
42962 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
42965 \begin_layout Section
42969 \begin_layout Standard
42970 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
42972 Document classes are described in section
42973 \begin_inset space ~
42977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42979 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
42987 \begin_layout Standard
42991 \begin_inset space ~
42996 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
43001 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
43002 as a layout for a document class.
43003 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
43005 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
43014 \begin_layout Standard
43015 Some classes use special class options by default.
43016 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
43020 and you can decide to use them or not.
43021 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
43022 recommended you leave them untouched.
43027 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43028 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
43033 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43035 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
43040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43041 When you want to use one of the following drivers
43042 \begin_inset Newline newline
43047 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
43050 \begin_inset Newline newline
43053 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43054 distribution, see section
43059 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43061 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
43073 \begin_layout Standard
43078 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
43079 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
43080 in the background if the child document
43081 is opened without its master.
43082 This way child documents are always compilable.
43083 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
43090 \begin_inset space ~
43098 \begin_layout Standard
43099 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43110 \begin_inset Index idx
43113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43115 -packages ! prettyref
43121 \begin_inset Index idx
43124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43126 -packages ! refstyle
43131 for cross-references, see section
43132 \begin_inset space ~
43136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43138 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43145 \begin_layout Section
43149 \begin_layout Standard
43150 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
43151 Please refer to the section
43154 \begin_inset space ~
43162 \begin_inset space ~
43167 manual for details.
43170 \begin_layout Section
43174 \begin_layout Standard
43175 Modules are explained in section
43176 \begin_inset space ~
43180 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43182 reference "subsec:Modules"
43189 \begin_layout Section
43193 \begin_layout Standard
43195 \begin_inset space ~
43199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43201 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
43208 \begin_layout Section
43212 \begin_layout Standard
43213 The document font settings are described in section
43214 \begin_inset space ~
43218 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43220 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
43227 \begin_layout Section
43231 \begin_layout Standard
43232 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
43244 \begin_inset space ~
43249 and whether it should be a
43252 \begin_inset space ~
43257 can also be specified here.
43260 \begin_layout Standard
43261 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
43262 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
43263 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
43265 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
43268 \begin_layout Standard
43271 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
43274 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
43275 justifies the text on screen.
43276 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
43280 \begin_layout Section
43284 \begin_layout Standard
43285 This dialog is described in sections
43286 \begin_inset space ~
43290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43292 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
43297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43299 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
43306 \begin_layout Section
43310 \begin_layout Standard
43311 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
43312 \begin_inset space ~
43316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43318 reference "subsec:Margins"
43325 \begin_layout Section
43327 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43329 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43334 \begin_inset Index idx
43337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43338 Language ! Encoding
43346 \begin_layout Standard
43347 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43348 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43349 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43351 is always encoded in utf8).
43352 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43353 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43354 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43355 -command is not known for
43356 a particular character).
43359 \begin_layout Standard
43360 If you use the option
43365 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43366 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43367 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43369 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43370 exactly one encoding.
43371 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43374 \begin_layout Standard
43376 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43377 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43378 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43379 installation supports Unicode), choose
43380 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43381 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43382 is quite incomplete, so
43383 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43388 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43389 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43390 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43391 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43392 -commands is not used, because all
43393 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43394 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43395 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43396 , two new alternative engines
43397 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43399 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43401 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43404 \begin_inset space ~
43412 \begin_inset space ~
43420 \begin_inset space ~
43426 \begin_inset space ~
43430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43432 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43437 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43441 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43444 \begin_layout Standard
43448 \begin_inset space ~
43453 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43454 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43464 The possible settings are:
43467 \begin_layout Description
43468 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43470 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43471 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43475 \begin_inset space ~
43479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43481 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43488 \begin_layout Description
43489 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43490 format you will use.
43491 In many cases this will be
43496 \begin_inset Index idx
43499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43507 If the newer package
43512 \begin_inset Index idx
43515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43517 -packages ! polyglossia
43522 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43523 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43524 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
43526 this package will be used instead of
43533 \begin_layout Description
43535 \begin_inset space ~
43546 would be more appropriate.
43549 \begin_layout Description
43550 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43551 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43555 (for German texts), type in
43558 \begin_inset Newline newline
43563 usepackage{ngerman}
43566 \begin_layout Description
43567 None will not use a language package.
43568 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
43571 \begin_layout Standard
43572 Here is a list with the important encodings:
43575 \begin_layout Description
43577 \begin_inset space ~
43581 \begin_inset space ~
43585 \begin_inset space ~
43592 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43598 \begin_inset Index idx
43601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43603 -packages ! inputenc
43609 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43610 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43611 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
43615 \begin_layout Description
43616 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43618 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
43619 commands, which may result in a big
43620 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43621 -commands are needed.
43624 \begin_layout Description
43626 \begin_inset space ~
43630 \begin_inset space ~
43633 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43636 \begin_layout Description
43638 \begin_inset space ~
43642 \begin_inset space ~
43645 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43648 \begin_layout Description
43650 \begin_inset space ~
43653 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43656 \begin_layout Description
43658 \begin_inset space ~
43662 \begin_inset space ~
43665 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
43666 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
43669 \begin_layout Description
43671 \begin_inset space ~
43675 \begin_inset space ~
43678 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
43682 \begin_layout Description
43684 \begin_inset space ~
43688 \begin_inset space ~
43691 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
43692 ISO-8859-13 encoding
43695 \begin_layout Description
43697 \begin_inset space ~
43701 \begin_inset space ~
43705 \begin_inset space ~
43708 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
43709 \begin_inset space ~
43715 \begin_layout Description
43717 \begin_inset space ~
43721 \begin_inset space ~
43725 \begin_inset space ~
43728 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
43729 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
43732 \begin_layout Description
43734 \begin_inset space ~
43738 \begin_inset space ~
43741 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
43742 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
43743 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43744 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43745 \begin_inset space ~
43749 \begin_inset space ~
43755 \begin_layout Description
43757 \begin_inset space ~
43761 \begin_inset space ~
43764 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
43765 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
43766 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43768 should try to use the encoding Unicode
43769 \begin_inset space ~
43773 \begin_inset space ~
43779 \begin_layout Description
43781 \begin_inset space ~
43785 \begin_inset space ~
43788 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
43791 \begin_layout Description
43793 \begin_inset space ~
43797 \begin_inset space ~
43800 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
43803 \begin_layout Description
43805 \begin_inset space ~
43809 \begin_inset space ~
43812 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
43815 \begin_layout Description
43817 \begin_inset space ~
43820 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
43823 \begin_layout Description
43825 \begin_inset space ~
43828 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
43831 \begin_layout Description
43833 \begin_inset space ~
43837 \begin_inset space ~
43840 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
43843 \begin_layout Description
43845 \begin_inset space ~
43849 \begin_inset space ~
43855 \begin_layout Description
43857 \begin_inset space ~
43861 \begin_inset space ~
43864 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
43867 \begin_layout Description
43869 \begin_inset space ~
43873 \begin_inset space ~
43879 \begin_layout Description
43881 \begin_inset space ~
43885 \begin_inset space ~
43888 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43894 \begin_inset Index idx
43897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43904 , when using this, set the document language to
43909 \begin_layout Description
43911 \begin_inset space ~
43915 \begin_inset space ~
43918 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43923 , when using this, set the document language to
43926 \begin_inset space ~
43932 \begin_layout Description
43934 \begin_inset space ~
43938 \begin_inset space ~
43941 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43947 \begin_inset Index idx
43950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43952 -packages ! japanese
43957 , when using this, set the document language to
43962 \begin_layout Description
43964 \begin_inset space ~
43968 \begin_inset space ~
43971 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43976 , when using this, set the document language to
43981 \begin_layout Description
43983 \begin_inset space ~
43987 \begin_inset space ~
43990 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43995 , when using this, set the document language to
44000 \begin_layout Description
44002 \begin_inset space ~
44005 (EUC-KR) for Korean
44008 \begin_layout Description
44010 \begin_inset space ~
44014 \begin_inset space ~
44018 \begin_inset space ~
44021 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
44024 \begin_layout Description
44026 \begin_inset space ~
44030 \begin_inset space ~
44034 \begin_inset space ~
44037 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
44038 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
44039 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
44042 \begin_layout Description
44044 \begin_inset space ~
44048 \begin_inset space ~
44054 \begin_layout Description
44056 \begin_inset space ~
44060 \begin_inset space ~
44063 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
44064 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
44067 \begin_layout Description
44069 \begin_inset space ~
44073 \begin_inset space ~
44076 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44082 \begin_inset Index idx
44085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44092 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
44095 \begin_layout Description
44097 \begin_inset space ~
44105 \begin_inset space ~
44108 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
44115 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44118 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44125 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44126 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44128 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
44131 \begin_layout Description
44133 \begin_inset space ~
44137 \begin_inset space ~
44140 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44146 \begin_inset Index idx
44149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44156 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
44159 \begin_layout Description
44161 \begin_inset space ~
44164 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44170 \begin_inset Index idx
44173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44175 -packages ! inputenc
44181 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
44185 \begin_layout Description
44187 \begin_inset space ~
44191 \begin_inset space ~
44195 \begin_inset space ~
44198 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
44199 \begin_inset space ~
44205 \begin_layout Description
44207 \begin_inset space ~
44211 \begin_inset space ~
44215 \begin_inset space ~
44218 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
44219 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
44220 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
44224 \begin_layout Description
44226 \begin_inset space ~
44230 \begin_inset space ~
44234 \begin_inset space ~
44237 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
44238 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
44241 \begin_layout Section
44243 \begin_inset Index idx
44246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44253 \begin_inset Index idx
44256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44263 \begin_inset Index idx
44266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44267 Color ! Shaded boxes
44273 \begin_inset Index idx
44276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44277 Color ! Greyed-out notes
44285 \begin_layout Standard
44286 Here you can alter the font color for the
44290 (default: black), for
44293 \begin_inset space ~
44298 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
44302 (default: white) and for
44305 \begin_inset space ~
44315 sets the color back to the default.
44318 \begin_layout Standard
44319 Clicking any button showing
44327 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
44328 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
44329 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
44330 later more quickly.
44333 \begin_layout Standard
44334 Note, if you change the
44337 \begin_inset space ~
44342 font color and use the option
44345 \begin_inset space ~
44350 in the document settings under
44353 \begin_inset space ~
44358 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44359 \begin_inset space ~
44363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44365 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44372 \begin_layout Standard
44373 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44379 \begin_layout Standard
44383 \begin_inset space ~
44392 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44395 \begin_inset space ~
44398 Code after a forced page break:
44401 \begin_layout Itemize
44402 For the page color:
44403 \begin_inset Newline newline
44410 pagecolor{color name}
44413 \begin_layout Itemize
44414 For the text color:
44415 \begin_inset Newline newline
44425 \begin_layout Standard
44426 You are restricted to one of
44462 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
44469 \begin_inset space ~
44475 \begin_inset Newline newline
44478 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
44479 names to refer to them:
44482 \begin_layout Itemize
44488 \begin_inset Newline newline
44493 page_backgroundcolor
44496 \begin_layout Itemize
44500 \begin_inset space ~
44506 \begin_inset Newline newline
44514 \begin_layout Itemize
44518 \begin_inset space ~
44524 \begin_inset Newline newline
44532 \begin_layout Itemize
44536 \begin_inset space ~
44542 \begin_inset Newline newline
44550 \begin_layout Standard
44551 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44554 \begin_inset space ~
44562 \begin_inset space ~
44570 \begin_layout Section
44574 \begin_layout Standard
44575 Here you can adjust the
44579 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
44583 as described in section
44584 \begin_inset space ~
44588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44590 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44597 \begin_layout Section
44601 \begin_layout Standard
44602 Here you can specify if a
44603 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887883
44606 citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44608 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887840
44614 \begin_inset Index idx
44617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44619 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887846
44621 -packages ! biblatex
44633 \begin_inset Index idx
44636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44648 \begin_inset Index idx
44651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44653 -packages ! jurabib
44660 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887869
44661 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44663 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887870
44668 Sectioned bibliography
44670 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44676 \begin_inset Index idx
44679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44681 -packages ! bibtopic
44687 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887945
44689 If you use Biblatex, you can select the style files and specify further
44694 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887949
44696 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887950
44700 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887962
44707 for the generation of the bibliography.
44708 For a further description
44709 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887970
44713 \begin_inset space ~
44717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44719 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44726 \begin_layout Section
44730 \begin_layout Standard
44731 Here you can define the
44735 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
44737 \begin_inset space ~
44741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44743 reference "sec:Index"
44750 \begin_layout Section
44754 \begin_layout Standard
44755 The PDF properties are explained in section
44756 \begin_inset space ~
44760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44762 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44769 \begin_layout Section
44773 \begin_layout Standard
44774 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
44775 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44781 \begin_inset Index idx
44784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44786 -packages ! amsmath
44796 \begin_inset Index idx
44799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44801 -packages ! amssymb
44811 \begin_inset Index idx
44814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44826 \begin_inset Index idx
44829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44841 \begin_inset Index idx
44844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44846 -packages ! mathdots
44856 \begin_inset Index idx
44859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44861 -packages ! mathtools
44871 \begin_inset Index idx
44874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44886 \begin_inset Index idx
44889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44891 -packages ! stackrel
44901 \begin_inset Index idx
44904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44906 -packages ! stmaryrd
44916 \begin_inset Index idx
44919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44921 -packages ! undertilde
44926 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
44929 \begin_layout Description
44930 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44931 -errors in formulas,
44932 ensure that you have this enabled.
44935 \begin_layout Description
44936 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
44937 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44938 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
44942 \begin_layout Description
44943 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
44946 \begin_inset space ~
44958 \begin_layout Description
44959 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
44962 \begin_inset space ~
44974 \begin_layout Description
44975 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
44986 \begin_layout Description
44987 mathtools is used for the math commands
45023 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
45030 \begin_layout Description
45031 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
45033 Chemical Symbols and Equations
45042 \begin_layout Description
45043 stackrel is used for the math command
45060 \begin_layout Description
45061 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
45064 \begin_layout Description
45065 undertilde is used for the math command
45073 Accents for one Character
45082 \begin_layout Section
45086 \begin_layout Standard
45087 The float placement options are described in the section
45090 \begin_inset space ~
45098 \begin_inset space ~
45106 \begin_layout Section
45110 \begin_layout Standard
45111 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
45113 Program Code Listings
45118 \begin_inset space ~
45126 \begin_layout Section
45130 \begin_layout Standard
45131 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
45139 set to be used and set the
45144 The itemize environment is described in section
45145 \begin_inset space ~
45149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45151 reference "sec:Itemize"
45158 \begin_layout Standard
45159 You can furthermore specify a
45162 \begin_inset space ~
45167 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45168 command of the desired character.
45169 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
45176 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
45178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45182 \begin_inset space \space{}
45186 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
45196 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
45197 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
45200 \begin_layout Standard
45201 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45209 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45210 -packages in the preamble (menu
45213 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45214 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45217 \begin_inset space ~
45223 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
45227 usepackage{textcomp}
45230 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
45234 usepackage{amssymb}
45244 \begin_layout Section
45248 \begin_layout Standard
45249 Branches are described in section
45250 \begin_inset space ~
45254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45256 reference "sec:Branches"
45263 \begin_layout Section
45265 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45267 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
45274 \begin_layout Standard
45275 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
45278 \begin_layout Description
45280 \begin_inset space ~
45284 \begin_inset space ~
45287 Format: The format that is used when you enter
45288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45307 View Master Document
45308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45315 Update Master Document
45316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45323 menu or the toolbar.
45324 The default is set in
45326 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45327 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45329 \begin_inset space ~
45332 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45336 \begin_inset space ~
45340 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45342 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45349 \begin_layout Description
45351 \begin_inset space ~
45355 \begin_inset space ~
45358 Output settings for the menu
45360 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45362 \begin_inset space ~
45368 For a detailed description see section
45370 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45375 \begin_inset space ~
45383 \begin_layout Description
45385 \begin_inset space ~
45389 \begin_inset space ~
45392 Options offers settings for the export format
45400 \begin_inset space ~
45405 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45406 \begin_inset space ~
45409 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45413 \begin_inset space ~
45418 settings are described in detail in section
45420 Math Output in XHTML
45425 \begin_inset space ~
45434 \begin_inset space ~
45438 \begin_inset space ~
45443 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45446 \begin_layout Description
45448 \begin_inset space ~
45453 Save transient properties
45455 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45456 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45457 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45461 \begin_layout Itemize
45462 the activation of change tracking
45465 \begin_layout Itemize
45466 the output of tracked changes
45469 \begin_layout Itemize
45470 the recording of the document directory path.
45473 \begin_layout Standard
45474 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45475 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45479 \begin_layout Section
45487 \begin_layout Standard
45488 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45490 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45492 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45494 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45498 \begin_layout Standard
45499 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45500 -syntax is given in section
45501 \begin_inset space ~
45505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45507 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
45514 \begin_layout Chapter
45520 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45522 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45527 \begin_inset Index idx
45530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45539 \begin_layout Standard
45540 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45542 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45546 It has the following submenus.
45549 \begin_layout Section
45553 \begin_layout Subsection
45557 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45558 User Interface File
45559 \begin_inset Index idx
45562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45563 Customization ! of toolbars
45569 \begin_inset Index idx
45572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45573 Customization ! of menus
45581 \begin_layout Standard
45582 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45583 interface (ui) file.
45584 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45592 \begin_layout Description
45597 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
45600 \begin_layout Description
45607 the menu entries in popup context menus
45610 \begin_layout Description
45615 specifies the toolbar buttons
45618 \begin_layout Standard
45619 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
45620 and edit the entries.
45623 \begin_layout Standard
45624 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
45636 entries must be finished with an explicit
45661 and in the case of the
45662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45674 The syntax for the entries is:
45677 \begin_layout Standard
45678 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45707 \begin_layout Standard
45709 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45712 All the \SpecialChar LyX
45713 -functions are listed in the menu
45715 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
45717 \begin_inset space ~
45725 \begin_layout Standard
45726 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45732 \begin_layout Standard
45733 For example, assuming you use the menu
45735 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45738 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
45742 \begin_layout Standard
45743 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45767 \begin_layout Standard
45769 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45784 to have the sixth bookmark.
45787 \begin_layout Standard
45791 \begin_inset space ~
45796 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
45797 's toolbar buttons.
45798 The currently available icon sets are compared in
45799 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45802 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
45809 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45813 \begin_layout Standard
45816 Enable tool tips in main work area
45818 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
45822 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45826 \begin_layout Standard
45831 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
45832 should display in the menu
45834 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45836 \begin_inset space ~
45844 \begin_layout Subsection
45848 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45852 \begin_layout Standard
45855 Restore window layouts and geometries
45858 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
45859 the last \SpecialChar LyX
45863 \begin_layout Standard
45866 Restore cursor positions
45868 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
45872 \begin_layout Standard
45875 Load opened files from last session
45877 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
45881 \begin_layout Standard
45884 Clear all session information
45886 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
45887 sessions (cursor positions, names
45888 of last opened documents, etc.).
45891 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45893 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45895 name "subsec:Backup documents"
45900 \begin_inset Index idx
45903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45912 \begin_layout Standard
45915 Backup original documents when saving
45917 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
45918 it was saved the last time.
45919 It is stored in the
45922 \begin_inset space ~
45928 \begin_inset space ~
45932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45934 reference "sec:Paths"
45938 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
45941 \begin_inset space ~
45947 The backup file has the file extension
45948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45962 \begin_layout Standard
45965 Backup documents, every
45967 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
45970 \begin_layout Standard
45973 Save documents compressed by default
45975 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
45976 \begin_inset space ~
45980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45982 reference "subsec:Compressed"
45987 This applies to newly created documents only.
45988 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
45991 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45992 Windows & work area
45995 \begin_layout Standard
45998 Open documents in tabs
46000 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
46004 \begin_layout Standard
46009 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
46014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46016 \begin_inset space ~
46020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46022 reference "sec:Paths"
46026 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
46033 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
46034 documents will be opened in the same running instance
46035 of \SpecialChar LyX
46037 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
46038 instance is created for each file.
46041 \begin_layout Standard
46044 Single close-tab button
46046 is checked, there will only be one close button (
46056 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
46057 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
46059 \change_inserted 274215730 1469338548
46060 Regardless of this option, one may always close a tab by middle-clicking
46066 \begin_layout Standard
46067 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46075 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
46076 before the change takes effect.
46084 \begin_layout Standard
46089 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
46091 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
46093 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
46097 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
46098 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
46099 and only want to close the view in once instance.
46102 \begin_layout Subsection
46104 \begin_inset Index idx
46107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46114 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46116 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
46123 \begin_layout Standard
46124 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
46128 \begin_layout Standard
46129 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46137 This section only deals with the fonts
46141 the \SpecialChar LyX
46143 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
46146 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46147 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46158 \begin_layout Standard
46159 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46176 (depends on the system) as its
46179 \begin_inset space ~
46195 \begin_layout Standard
46196 You can change the font size with the
46203 \begin_layout Standard
46208 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
46210 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46213 points have the size of 1
46214 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46218 \begin_inset space ~
46222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46224 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
46229 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
46230 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46234 The sizes are explained in detail in section
46235 \begin_inset space ~
46239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46241 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
46248 \begin_layout Standard
46251 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
46253 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
46254 needs to redraw the screen less often.
46255 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
46256 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
46257 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
46259 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
46260 \begin_inset space ~
46266 \begin_layout Subsection
46268 \begin_inset Index idx
46271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46272 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
46279 \begin_inset Index idx
46282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46291 \begin_layout Standard
46292 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
46293 by choosing an item in the
46294 list and selecting the
46301 \begin_layout Standard
46302 By checking the option
46306 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
46309 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
46310 \begin_inset space ~
46314 \begin_inset space ~
46319 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
46322 \begin_layout Subsection
46324 \begin_inset Index idx
46327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46336 \begin_layout Standard
46337 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
46341 \begin_layout Standard
46346 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46347 This feature is described in section
46348 \begin_inset space ~
46352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46354 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46361 \begin_layout Standard
46362 Checking the option
46365 \begin_inset space ~
46369 \begin_inset space ~
46373 \begin_inset space ~
46378 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46381 \begin_layout Section
46383 \begin_inset Index idx
46386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46395 \begin_layout Subsection
46399 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46403 \begin_layout Standard
46406 Cursor follows scrollbar
46408 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46412 \begin_layout Standard
46413 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46414 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46415 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46418 \begin_layout Standard
46421 Scroll below end of document
46423 is self-explanatory.
46426 \begin_layout Standard
46427 In \SpecialChar LyX
46428 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46435 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46437 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46438 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46441 \begin_layout Standard
46444 Sort environments alphabetically
46446 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46449 \begin_layout Standard
46452 Group environments by their category
46454 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46457 \begin_layout Standard
46462 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46473 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46477 \begin_layout Standard
46478 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46483 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46484 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46488 \begin_layout Subsection
46490 \begin_inset Index idx
46493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46500 \begin_inset Index idx
46503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46504 Settings ! Shortcuts
46512 \begin_layout Standard
46517 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
46519 Several binding files are available, among them:
46522 \begin_layout Description
46523 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46526 \begin_layout Description
46527 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
46539 \begin_layout Description
46540 mac.bind a set of bindings for
46543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46551 \begin_layout Standard
46552 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
46557 , and binding files for special languages.
46558 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
46559 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46563 \begin_inset space \space{}
46567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46575 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
46576 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
46577 will try to use the appropriate binding
46581 \begin_layout Standard
46582 Some binding files, like
46586 , only have a limited scope.
46587 When looking at the end of the file
46591 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46594 \begin_layout Standard
46598 \begin_inset space ~
46602 \begin_inset space ~
46607 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
46608 in the selected key binding file.
46611 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46613 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46615 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
46620 \begin_inset Index idx
46623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46624 Key Bindings ! Editing
46632 \begin_layout Standard
46633 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
46634 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
46635 functions and the bound shortcuts.
46636 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46639 Show key-bindings containing
46642 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46643 Insert there for example as keyword
46644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46651 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
46652 functions that contain
46653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46661 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46662 All \SpecialChar LyX
46663 functions are also listed in the file
46668 that you will find in the
46675 \begin_layout Standard
46676 For example, to add the shortcut
46684 , select the function and press the
46689 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46690 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46693 \begin_layout Standard
46694 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46695 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
46697 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
46698 function names as a semicolon separated list.
46700 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46705 \begin_layout Standard
46706 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
46709 \begin_layout Standard
46710 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
46712 The syntax of the entries is:
46715 \begin_layout Standard
46721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46740 \begin_layout Subsection
46742 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46744 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46749 \begin_inset Index idx
46752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46759 \begin_inset Index idx
46762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46763 Settings ! Keyboard Map
46771 \begin_layout Standard
46772 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
46773 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
46774 provides keyboard maps.
46775 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
46776 is a Romanian one, you can enable
46779 \begin_inset space ~
46783 \begin_inset space ~
46788 and select the keyboard map file named
46795 \begin_layout Standard
46804 keyboard map and, if you use the
46808 bindings, you can select the first and second with
46811 arg "keymap-primary"
46817 arg "keymap-secondary"
46820 respectively or toggle between them with
46823 arg "keymap-toggle"
46829 \begin_layout Standard
46830 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46838 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
46847 \begin_layout Standard
46848 You can also specify the mouse
46850 Wheel scrolling speed
46853 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
46857 Middle mouse button pasting
46859 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
46860 inserts the content of the clipboard.
46863 \begin_layout Standard
46871 \begin_inset space ~
46875 \begin_inset space ~
46880 you can select a key for zooming.
46881 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
46884 \begin_layout Subsection
46888 \begin_layout Standard
46889 Input completion is described in section
46890 \begin_inset space ~
46894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46896 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
46903 \begin_layout Section
46905 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46912 \begin_inset Index idx
46915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46922 \begin_inset Index idx
46925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46934 \begin_layout Standard
46935 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
46936 are normally determined during
46938 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
46941 \begin_layout Description
46943 \begin_inset space ~
46946 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
46947 's working directory.
46948 It is the default when you
46959 \begin_inset space ~
46967 \begin_layout Description
46969 \begin_inset space ~
46972 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
46974 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46976 \begin_inset space ~
46980 \begin_inset space ~
46988 \begin_layout Description
46990 \begin_inset space ~
46993 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
46999 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47003 \begin_inset Newline newline
47007 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47019 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
47020 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
47028 \begin_layout Description
47030 \begin_inset space ~
47034 \begin_inset Index idx
47037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47043 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
47044 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
47045 \begin_inset space ~
47049 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47051 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47059 will be used to save the backups.
47060 \begin_inset Newline newline
47063 Backup files have the ending
47064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47074 \begin_layout Description
47076 \begin_inset space ~
47079 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
47080 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
47082 \begin_inset Newline newline
47089 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47095 You can edit this file with the program
47104 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
47105 in its preferences under
47108 \begin_inset space ~
47114 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
47119 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
47121 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
47122 in your \SpecialChar LyX
47128 and \SpecialChar LyX
47129 need to be running the same time.
47130 \begin_inset Newline newline
47133 The pipe is also used for the
47137 feature, see section
47138 \begin_inset space ~
47142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47144 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47149 \begin_inset Newline newline
47152 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
47153 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
47154 \begin_inset Newline newline
47170 \begin_layout Description
47172 \begin_inset space ~
47175 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
47178 \begin_layout Description
47180 \begin_inset space ~
47183 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
47184 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
47185 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
47188 \begin_layout Description
47190 \begin_inset space ~
47193 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
47199 You only need to specify it if you are using
47203 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
47205 For \SpecialChar LyX
47210 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
47214 \begin_layout Description
47216 \begin_inset space ~
47219 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
47220 When \SpecialChar LyX
47221 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
47222 to find it on the system.
47223 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
47225 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
47227 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47231 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47234 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
47235 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
47238 \begin_layout Description
47240 \begin_inset space ~
47243 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
47244 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
47245 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
47246 code or in the document
47248 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
47250 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
47251 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
47252 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
47253 scanned for the input files.
47254 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
47255 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47257 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
47258 compilation may fail for some documents.
47261 \begin_layout Section
47265 \begin_layout Standard
47266 Here you can insert your
47275 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
47277 \begin_inset space ~
47281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47283 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47287 , to mark changes you make as yours.
47290 \begin_layout Section
47292 \begin_inset Index idx
47295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47296 Language ! Settings
47302 \begin_inset Index idx
47305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47306 Settings ! Language
47314 \begin_layout Subsection
47316 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47318 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47325 \begin_layout Description
47327 \begin_inset space ~
47331 \begin_inset space ~
47334 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
47336 You can find its actual translation status here:
47337 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47339 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47346 \begin_layout Description
47348 \begin_inset space ~
47351 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
47352 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
47353 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47354 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47371 The most widespread language package is
47376 \begin_inset Index idx
47379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47386 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47388 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47389 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47390 come with the alternative
47396 \begin_inset Index idx
47399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47401 -packages ! polyglossia
47406 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47407 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47413 The available selections are described in section
47414 \begin_inset space ~
47418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47420 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47427 \begin_layout Description
47429 \begin_inset space ~
47432 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47433 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47434 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47435 An example is the start command
47441 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47443 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47447 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47462 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47467 \begin_layout Description
47469 \begin_inset space ~
47477 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47478 command toggles the package on and off.
47481 \begin_layout Description
47483 \begin_inset space ~
47487 \begin_inset space ~
47490 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
47494 \begin_layout Description
47496 \begin_inset space ~
47500 \begin_inset space ~
47503 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
47507 \begin_layout Description
47509 \begin_inset space ~
47513 \begin_inset space ~
47516 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47517 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47518 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
47520 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47527 \begin_layout Description
47529 \begin_inset space ~
47532 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47534 When this option is not set, the
47537 \begin_inset space ~
47542 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47544 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47547 \begin_inset space ~
47555 \begin_layout Description
47557 \begin_inset space ~
47563 \begin_inset space ~
47569 When it is not set, the
47572 \begin_inset space ~
47577 is set to the end of the document.
47580 \begin_layout Description
47582 \begin_inset space ~
47586 \begin_inset space ~
47589 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47590 language will be underlined in blue.
47593 \begin_layout Description
47595 \begin_inset space ~
47599 \begin_inset space ~
47602 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
47603 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
47606 \begin_layout Description
47608 \begin_inset space ~
47611 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
47612 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
47613 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
47614 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
47617 \begin_layout Subsection
47621 \begin_layout Standard
47622 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
47623 \begin_inset space ~
47627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47629 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47636 \begin_layout Section
47640 \begin_layout Subsection
47642 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47644 name "subsec:General-output"
47651 \begin_layout Description
47653 \begin_inset space ~
47656 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47658 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47660 \begin_inset space ~
47666 For a detailed description see section
47668 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47673 \begin_inset space ~
47681 \begin_layout Description
47683 \begin_inset space ~
47686 Options Options for the program
47690 that is used for the export format
47695 \begin_inset space ~
47699 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47701 reference "subsec:Export"
47706 Possible options are listed in the
47711 \begin_inset Newline newline
47715 \begin_inset Flex URL
47718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47720 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
47730 \begin_layout Description
47732 \begin_inset space ~
47736 \begin_inset space ~
47739 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
47742 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47743 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
47745 \begin_inset space ~
47751 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
47754 \begin_layout Description
47756 \begin_inset space ~
47760 \begin_inset Index idx
47763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47770 \begin_inset Index idx
47773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47774 Settings ! Date format
47779 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
47780 \begin_inset Newline newline
47784 \begin_inset Flex URL
47787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47789 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
47795 \begin_inset Newline newline
47798 For example the format
47799 \begin_inset Newline newline
47803 \begin_inset Newline newline
47806 prints the date as day/month/year.
47809 \begin_layout Description
47811 \begin_inset space ~
47815 \begin_inset space ~
47818 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
47819 is allowed to overwrite on export.
47822 \begin_layout Subsection
47828 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47830 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
47835 \begin_inset Index idx
47838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47839 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
47848 \begin_layout Description
47850 \begin_inset space ~
47858 \begin_inset space ~
47862 \begin_inset space ~
47865 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
47870 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
47891 are used for Cyrillic.
47892 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
47893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47905 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
47907 sets up in the background.
47908 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
47911 \begin_layout Description
47913 \begin_inset space ~
47917 \begin_inset space ~
47921 \begin_inset space ~
47925 \begin_inset space ~
47928 options They only have an effect when the program
47932 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
47935 \begin_layout Standard
47936 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
47937 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
47938 manuals of the applications.
47941 \begin_layout Description
47943 \begin_inset space ~
47946 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
47947 \begin_inset space ~
47951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47953 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
47960 \begin_layout Description
47962 \begin_inset space ~
47965 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
47966 \begin_inset space ~
47970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47972 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
47979 \begin_layout Description
47981 \begin_inset space ~
47984 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
47985 \begin_inset space ~
47989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47991 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
47998 \begin_layout Description
48004 \begin_inset space ~
48007 command Command for the program
48009 Check\SpecialChar TeX
48012 that is described in the section
48014 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
48019 Additional Features
48024 \begin_layout Standard
48025 There are additionally the following options:
48028 \begin_layout Description
48030 \begin_inset space ~
48034 \begin_inset space ~
48038 \begin_inset space ~
48042 \begin_inset space ~
48047 \begin_inset space ~
48050 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
48051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48068 to separate folders.
48069 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
48071 \begin_inset Index idx
48074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48081 \begin_inset Index idx
48084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48093 \begin_layout Description
48095 \begin_inset space ~
48099 \begin_inset space ~
48103 \begin_inset space ~
48107 \begin_inset space ~
48111 \begin_inset space ~
48115 \begin_inset space ~
48118 changes Removes all manually set
48124 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48125 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48127 \begin_inset space ~
48132 dialog when changing the document class.
48135 \begin_layout Section
48137 \begin_inset space ~
48141 \begin_inset Index idx
48144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48153 \begin_layout Subsection
48155 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48157 name "subsec:Converters"
48162 \begin_inset Index idx
48165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48174 \begin_layout Standard
48175 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
48176 from one format to another.
48177 You can modify converters or create new ones.
48178 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
48185 \begin_inset space ~
48190 field and press the
48195 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
48199 \begin_inset space ~
48204 drop-down list, modify the
48208 field and press the
48215 \begin_layout Standard
48218 Converter File Cache
48224 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
48226 Maximum Age (in days
48229 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
48230 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
48233 \begin_layout Standard
48234 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
48235 definition, is described in the section
48246 \begin_layout Subsection
48248 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48250 name "sec:File-Formats"
48255 \begin_inset Index idx
48258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48265 \begin_inset Index idx
48268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48277 \begin_layout Standard
48278 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
48288 programs that should be used for certain formats.
48291 \begin_layout Standard
48292 You can also define the
48294 Default output format
48296 that is used when you use
48298 View, Update, View Master Document
48302 Update Master Document
48308 menu or the toolbar.
48311 \begin_layout Standard
48312 More about formats and their options is described in the section
48323 \begin_layout Standard
48324 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
48326 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
48327 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
48328 This is done by specifying a
48333 More about this is described in the section
48344 \begin_layout Chapter
48345 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48347 \begin_inset Index idx
48350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48357 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48359 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48366 \begin_layout Standard
48368 \begin_inset space ~
48372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48374 reference "tab:Units"
48378 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48379 and used in this documentation.
48382 \begin_layout Standard
48383 \begin_inset Float table
48389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48390 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48393 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48408 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48416 \begin_inset Tabular
48417 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
48418 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48419 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48420 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48421 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48554 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48558 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48591 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48595 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48627 scaled point (65536
48628 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48632 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48665 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48669 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48702 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48706 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48710 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48743 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48779 % of original image width
48784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49061 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49065 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49095 \begin_layout Chapter
49097 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49099 name "chap:Credits"
49106 \begin_layout Standard
49107 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
49108 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
49111 \begin_layout Itemize
49114 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
49117 \begin_layout Itemize
49123 \begin_layout Itemize
49129 \begin_layout Itemize
49135 \begin_layout Itemize
49141 \begin_layout Itemize
49147 \begin_layout Itemize
49153 \begin_layout Itemize
49159 \begin_layout Itemize
49162 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
49165 \begin_layout Itemize
49171 \begin_layout Itemize
49177 \begin_layout Itemize
49183 \begin_layout Itemize
49189 \begin_layout Itemize
49195 \begin_layout Itemize
49201 \begin_layout Itemize
49207 \begin_layout Itemize
49213 \begin_layout Itemize
49214 The \SpecialChar LyX
49216 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
49225 \begin_layout Standard
49226 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
49229 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
49236 \begin_layout Bibliography
49237 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49238 LatexCommand bibitem
49244 The \SpecialChar LyX
49246 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49249 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
49254 \begin_inset Newline newline
49258 \begin_inset Flex URL
49261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49263 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
49271 \begin_layout Bibliography
49272 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49273 LatexCommand bibitem
49274 key "latexcompanion"
49278 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
49280 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49281 Companion Second Edition.
49284 Addison-Wesley, 2004
49287 \begin_layout Bibliography
49288 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49289 LatexCommand bibitem
49294 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
49297 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
49301 Addison-Wesley, 2003
49304 \begin_layout Bibliography
49305 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49306 LatexCommand bibitem
49314 : A Document Preparation System.
49317 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
49320 \begin_layout Bibliography
49321 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49322 LatexCommand bibitem
49331 The \SpecialChar TeX
49335 Addison-Wesley, 1984
49338 \begin_layout Bibliography
49339 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49340 LatexCommand bibitem
49345 The \SpecialChar TeX
49347 \begin_inset Newline newline
49351 \begin_inset Flex URL
49354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49356 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
49364 \begin_layout Bibliography
49365 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49366 LatexCommand bibitem
49371 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49373 \begin_inset Newline newline
49377 \begin_inset Flex URL
49380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49382 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49390 \begin_layout Bibliography
49391 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49392 LatexCommand bibitem
49398 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49400 name "Documentation"
49401 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49407 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49411 \begin_inset Newline newline
49415 \begin_inset Flex URL
49418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49420 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49428 \begin_layout Bibliography
49429 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49430 LatexCommand bibitem
49436 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49438 name "Documentation"
49439 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49443 how to use the program
49445 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49449 \begin_inset Newline newline
49453 \begin_inset Flex URL
49456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49458 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49464 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884806
49468 \begin_layout Bibliography
49470 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884882
49471 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49472 LatexCommand bibitem
49478 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49481 target "http://www.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49490 \begin_inset Newline newline
49494 \begin_inset Flex URL
49497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49499 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884888
49501 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49511 \begin_layout Bibliography
49512 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49513 LatexCommand bibitem
49519 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49521 name "Documentation"
49522 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49531 \begin_inset Newline newline
49535 \begin_inset Flex URL
49538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49540 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49548 \begin_layout Bibliography
49549 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49550 LatexCommand bibitem
49551 key "makeindex-man"
49556 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49559 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49568 \begin_inset Newline newline
49572 \begin_inset Flex URL
49575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49577 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49585 \begin_layout Bibliography
49586 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49587 LatexCommand bibitem
49593 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49595 name "Documentation"
49596 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49605 \begin_inset Newline newline
49609 \begin_inset Flex URL
49612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49614 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49622 \begin_layout Bibliography
49623 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49624 LatexCommand bibitem
49630 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49632 name "Documentation"
49633 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
49637 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
49639 \begin_inset Newline newline
49643 \begin_inset Flex URL
49646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49648 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
49656 \begin_layout Bibliography
49657 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49658 LatexCommand bibitem
49664 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49666 name "Documentation"
49667 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
49671 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49677 \begin_inset Index idx
49680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49682 -packages ! caption
49688 \begin_inset Newline newline
49692 \begin_inset Flex URL
49695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49697 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
49705 \begin_layout Bibliography
49706 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49707 LatexCommand bibitem
49713 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49715 name "Documentation"
49716 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
49720 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49726 \begin_inset Index idx
49729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49731 -packages ! enumitem
49737 \begin_inset Newline newline
49741 \begin_inset Flex URL
49744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49746 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
49754 \begin_layout Bibliography
49755 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49756 LatexCommand bibitem
49762 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49764 name "Documentation"
49765 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
49769 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49775 \begin_inset Index idx
49778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49780 -packages ! fancyhdr
49786 \begin_inset Newline newline
49790 \begin_inset Flex URL
49793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49795 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
49803 \begin_layout Bibliography
49804 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49805 LatexCommand bibitem
49811 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49813 name "Documentation"
49814 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
49818 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49824 \begin_inset Index idx
49827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49829 -packages ! hyperref
49835 \begin_inset Newline newline
49839 \begin_inset Flex URL
49842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49844 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
49852 \begin_layout Bibliography
49853 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49854 LatexCommand bibitem
49860 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49862 name "Documentation"
49863 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
49867 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49873 \begin_inset Index idx
49876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49878 -packages ! nomencl
49884 \begin_inset Newline newline
49888 \begin_inset Flex URL
49891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49893 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
49901 \begin_layout Bibliography
49902 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49903 LatexCommand bibitem
49909 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49911 name "Documentation"
49912 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
49916 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49922 \begin_inset Index idx
49925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49927 -packages ! prettyref
49933 \begin_inset Newline newline
49937 \begin_inset Flex URL
49940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49942 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
49950 \begin_layout Bibliography
49951 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49952 LatexCommand bibitem
49958 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49960 name "Documentation"
49961 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
49965 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49971 \begin_inset Index idx
49974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49976 -packages ! refstyle
49982 \begin_inset Newline newline
49986 \begin_inset Flex URL
49989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49991 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
49999 \begin_layout Bibliography
50000 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50001 LatexCommand bibitem
50007 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50010 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
50014 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50016 \begin_inset Newline newline
50020 \begin_inset Flex URL
50023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50025 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
50033 \begin_layout Bibliography
50034 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50035 LatexCommand bibitem
50041 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50044 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
50048 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50050 \begin_inset Newline newline
50054 \begin_inset Flex URL
50057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50059 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
50067 \begin_layout Bibliography
50068 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50069 LatexCommand bibitem
50075 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50078 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
50082 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50083 for Cyrillic languages:
50084 \begin_inset Newline newline
50088 \begin_inset Flex URL
50091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50093 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
50101 \begin_layout Bibliography
50102 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50103 LatexCommand bibitem
50109 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50112 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
50116 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50118 \begin_inset Newline newline
50122 \begin_inset Flex URL
50125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50127 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
50135 \begin_layout Bibliography
50136 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50137 LatexCommand bibitem
50143 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50146 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
50150 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50152 \begin_inset Newline newline
50156 \begin_inset Flex URL
50159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50161 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
50169 \begin_layout Bibliography
50170 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50171 LatexCommand bibitem
50177 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50180 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
50184 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50186 \begin_inset Newline newline
50190 \begin_inset Flex URL
50193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50195 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
50203 \begin_layout Bibliography
50204 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50205 LatexCommand bibitem
50211 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50214 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
50218 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50220 \begin_inset Newline newline
50224 \begin_inset Flex URL
50227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50229 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
50237 \begin_layout Bibliography
50238 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50239 LatexCommand bibitem
50245 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50248 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
50252 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50254 \begin_inset Newline newline
50258 \begin_inset Flex URL
50261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50263 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
50271 \begin_layout Bibliography
50272 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50273 LatexCommand bibitem
50279 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50282 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
50286 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50288 \begin_inset Newline newline
50292 \begin_inset Flex URL
50295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50297 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
50305 \begin_layout Bibliography
50306 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50307 LatexCommand bibitem
50313 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50316 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
50320 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50322 \begin_inset Newline newline
50326 \begin_inset Flex URL
50329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50331 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
50339 \begin_layout Bibliography
50340 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50341 LatexCommand bibitem
50347 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50350 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
50354 about new features in
50360 \begin_inset Newline newline
50364 \begin_inset Flex URL
50367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50369 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
50377 \begin_layout Standard
50378 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50412 \begin_inset Note Note
50415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50422 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50423 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50424 bibliography is the second one:
50432 \begin_layout Standard
50433 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
50434 LatexCommand bibtex
50435 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
50436 options "biblio/alphadin"
50443 \begin_layout Standard
50444 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50448 \begin_layout Standard
50449 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
50450 LatexCommand printnomenclature
50456 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
50457 LatexCommand printindex